JP2023021382A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an attention degree to a game.

SOLUTION: A pachinko machine includes an accessory device 150 provided with an open/close accessory 168. When being shifted to a second open/close execution mode, a round game in which variable ball entry control for opening/closing an open/close accessory 168 is performed at least once is executed. In the accessory device 150, a V winning sensor is provided. A game ball passing through the sensor triggers execution of a next round game. In the present pachinko machine, a game ball having entered the accessory device 150 for winning in a previous round game is allowed to pass through the V winning sensor in a round game to be executed after the previous round game.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with a variable ball entry device is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325811

Here, in gaming machines, it is desired to devise ways to increase the degree of attention to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing attention to games.

The present invention
a shooting means for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A variable input that can be switched between a first mode in which a game ball shot by the shooting means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode in which a game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first mode. ball means;
variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, attention to games can be improved.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a front view of a back pack unit. (a) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory device, and (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which decompose|disassembles and shows a accessory apparatus. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an exploded rotator unit that constitutes the accessory device. It is a top view which shows a rotary body unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a result table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening timing table. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality monitoring processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flowchart which shows game stop determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows game control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 4 is a flowchart showing control start processing; It is a flowchart which shows a process during control. It is a flowchart which shows the process for action parts in a role product. It is a flow chart which shows prize-winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round pattern table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening/closing pattern table; It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first distribution pattern table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second distribution pattern table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of distribution patterns. It is an explanatory view for explaining distribution characteristics. 10 is a flow chart showing processing during opening. 4 is a flowchart showing round update processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for passage in an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball|bowl determination process. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening and closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the playability of each round game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of remaining ball monitoring. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game in the second opening/closing execution mode in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening/closing pattern table according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball|bowl determination process. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening and closing execution mode. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing open-time processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the round game of the second round. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening timing table according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing remaining ball determination processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing normal processing. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game after the second opening/closing execution mode is finished; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game after the second opening/closing execution mode is finished; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of remaining ball determination; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening timing table according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing game control processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing success/failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball|bowl determination process. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game when the waiting time for opening the shutter has passed without the first opening/closing execution mode occurring; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs before the waiting time for opening the shutter elapses; FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the waiting time for opening and the flow of a game in the first opening/closing execution mode; FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body unit that constitutes a accessory device according to a seventh embodiment; (a) is a flow chart showing setting processing for each round, and (b) is a flow chart showing setting processing for an opening/closing member. (a) and (b) are flow charts showing round update processing, and (c) is a flow chart showing processing for action parts in the role product. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening and closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows another example of a game machine.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area to be described later to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61 . A display light-emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various lamp portions. Speaker units 64 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65 , and a lower plate 72 that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66 . The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 .

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 72 in the front door frame 14 . When the shooting handle 60 is operated, a game ball is shot toward the game area from a game ball shooting mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13 . In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 60, the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, that is, the momentum of shooting is changed.

A game area is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13 . The configuration of the game board 24 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24 , and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . In addition, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 form a guide rail 34 for guiding the game ball to the game area, and the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism when the player rotates the shooting handle 60 is It is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 34 .

The guide rail 34 is formed on one side of the game area so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60 by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the department side. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the area of the game board 24 that is defined as the game area by router processing. Each opening includes a general prize winning port 35, a first operating port (first starting ball entry portion) 38, a second operating port (second starting ball entry portion) 39, a accessory device 150, a through gate 41, and a variable display unit. 42, a main display section 43, a character item display section 44, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning port 35, the first actuation port 38, the second actuation port 39 and the accessory device 150, it is detected by a detection sensor (first actuation sensor 38a) arranged on the back side of the game board 24. , second operation sensor 39c, entrance sensor 179 (see FIG. 10, etc.)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are dispensed based on the detection results. In this case, when a ball enters the first operating port 38 and when a ball enters the second operating port 39, seven prize balls are paid out, and the ball enters the general winning port 35. When a ball is generated, 8 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number may be different.

In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 45.例文帳に追加The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of nails 46 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being stopped. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the game ball entering the out port 45, the game ball entering the accessory device 150, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, or the through gate 41 Entering a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The accessory device 150 is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 24 . The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction below the accessory device 150 on the game board 24 . Two first operating ports 38 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory device 150 , and the second operating port 39 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right first operating ports 38 . In relation to the role device 150, the left and right first operation ports 38 are arranged so as to sandwich the role device 150, and a game ball that does not enter the role device 150 will enter one of the first operation ports. 38 can be reached (a prize can be won). In addition, the horizontal distance between both the first operating openings 38 and the accessory device 150 is equal to or larger than the diameter of one game ball, and the first operating opening 38 and the accessory device 150 are spaced apart. A game ball can flow down.

Also, the second operation port 39 is arranged below the accessory device 150 . The second working port 39 is arranged slightly lower than both the first working ports 38, and the game ball that has not entered the accessory device 150 or the first working port 38 can reach the second working port 39. (Possible to enter).

The second operation port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 39a is connected to an electric accessory driving portion 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory driving portion 39b to be in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and It is placed in either open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric role product 39a, the game ball cannot enter the second operation port 39, and when the electric role object 39a is in the open state, the prize in the second operation port 39 becomes possible.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and a state in which the game ball to the second operation opening 39 is likely to win, A configuration in which the electric accessory 39a is switched may be employed. Alternatively, the electric accessory 39a may be defective, and switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the second operating port 39 itself.

The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.例文帳に追加

A main display portion 43 and a character object display portion 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47 . That is, the main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls can be seen in front of these display portions 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

In the main display portion 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each operation port 38, 39 is clearly displayed by displaying a pattern or the like.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by other types of display devices such as CRT, dot matrix and the like. The patterns displayed on the main display unit 43 include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. The displayed configuration and the like are conceivable.

In the character item display unit 44, the winning of the through gate 41 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is displayed. indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 41 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the display part 44 for the accessory and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operation opening 39 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 42 is provided with a pattern display device 51 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. The pattern display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

A first holding light-emitting portion 54 and a second holding light-emitting portion 55 corresponding to the main display portion 43 are provided in a portion of the decorative member 47 below the main display portion 43 . In the first holding light emitting part 54, a plurality of (more specifically, four) light emitting parts are arranged side by side. The number of pending items is displayed by lighting the part 54 . In the second holding light emitting part 55, a plurality of (more specifically, four) light emitting parts are arranged side by side. The number of reserved items is displayed by lighting the part 55 . A third holding light-emitting portion 56 corresponding to the character object display portion 44 is provided in a portion of the decorative member 47 below the character object display portion 44 . The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 41 is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by lighting the third suspension light emitting part 56.例文帳に追加It should be noted that part or all of the holding light emitting units 54 to 56 may be configured to be displayed by part of the pattern display device 51, or the like.

The accessory device 150 becomes an open state on the condition that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the entry of a game ball to the accessory device 150 becomes possible. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and then enters a V winning hole provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192, which will be described later, and a jackpot state occurs.

Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 6(b) is a plan view showing a simplified configuration of passages provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a rotator unit 180 that constitutes the accessory device 150, and FIG. 9 is a plan view of the rotator unit 180. FIG.

The role product device 150 is roughly composed of a role product unit 160 and a rotator unit 180 . As shown in FIG. 7, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is fixed to the game board 24 with screws. The base frame 161 is vertically partitioned by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed with an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161 . The variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

A pair of opening/closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 is provided on both left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161 . A passage forming member 171 and a driving portion fixing plate 172 are provided on the back side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening/closing accessory driving portions 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back of the driving portion fixing plate 172. there is One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive portion fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening and closing accessory driving portion 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft portion of the opening and closing accessory 168. Concatenated. Therefore, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened by driving the opening/closing accessory driving section 173 .

To explain the opening operation in detail, each opening and closing accessory 168 stands upward when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited), and each tip approaches the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening/closing accessory 168 opens outward, and between the tip of each opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167, there is a game ball. A gap larger than one can be created. With such a configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each openable accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is in an open state. Even when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening and closing accessory 168 stands up), when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited) (When the opening and closing accessory 168 is open to the outside). It may be configured so that it can enter the object device 150 . For example, when the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven, the gap between the tip of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is A configuration in which the same gap becomes larger when driven is conceivable.

In addition, the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 is configured such that it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the game machine by the passage forming member 171 and the drive section fixing plate 172, and the back side of the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 is covered by the cover member 174. there is

A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161 . An extending wall 175a formed in the upper part of the front frame 175 extends upward from the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161, and the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 is forwardly moved by the extending wall 175a. Jumping out to is regulated.

The passage forming member 171 is formed with a passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163. Further, a game ball passage 178 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the far side of the passage plate 177 (Fig. 6(b)). The passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178, and the width of the passage plate 177 is narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, so that the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 It is guided to passageway 178 . The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. - 特許庁An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178 , and the game ball entering the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179 . As a result, entry of a game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. The entrance sensor 179 is configured by a well-known proximity sensor.

A rotator unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be positioned below the passage forming member 171 . The rotator unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191, as shown in FIG.

The guiding passage forming member 181 is formed with a concave portion 182 which is recessed downward at substantially the center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper opening of the recess 182 . The guide passage 183 is bilaterally symmetrical and slopes down from the center of the back side toward the center of the front side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is positioned at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161 . The center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is positioned vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160 . A passage wall 183a forming the innermost center of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage walls 183a, and a horizontally extending passage cover 184 is formed above the inner guide passage 183. . However, an entrance opening 184a is formed in the passage cover 184, and in a plan view (see FIG. 9), only the center of the inner portion of the guide passage 183 is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184 a overlaps the exit of the game ball passage 178 , the game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 reliably reaches the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side.

A ball distribution portion 185 is formed in the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side. The ball distribution portion 185 has an inclined surface 185a that slopes downward from the right side to the left side. A game ball that has reached the ball sorting portion 185 is guided to the left guiding passage 183 along the slope of the inclined surface 185a. Then, it rolls along the slope of the guide passage 183 and is guided to the near side of the guide passage 183 . A lead-out portion 186 inclined toward the recess 182 is formed on the front side of the guide passage 183 .

A V-winning opening 182a is formed on the bottom surface of the concave portion 182 . The V winning opening 182a communicates with the V winning passage 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a. In this case, a V winning path 191a is provided with a V winning path 192, and a game ball passing through the V winning path 191a is detected by the V winning path 192. FIG.

A side surface of the concave portion 182 is formed with an outlet 182b. The exit 182b communicates with a discharge passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the exit 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the discharge passage 191b. In this case, a sensor 193 for removal is provided in the passage 191b for removal, and a game ball passing through the passage 191b for removal is detected by the sensor 193 for removal. Note that the V winning sensor 192 and the missing sensor 193 are configured by well-known proximity sensors. In addition, game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a and the exit passage 191b are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge passage (not shown).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the accessory device 150 is not provided with a discharge path other than the route passing through the V winning path 191a or the exit path 191b, and the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 is the accessory. When discharged to the outside of the device 150, it always passes through either the V winning path 191a or the exit path 191b.

A rotating body driving portion 194 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from below. passes through. A rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. Note that the rotor drive unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape with a slightly smaller diameter than the recessed portion 182 of the guide passage forming member 181 and is positioned within the recessed portion 182 . Then, the rotating body 201 rotates clockwise as the rotating body driving section 194 is driven. Ten inwardly recessed ball guide portions 202 are formed on the outer periphery of the rotor 201, and these ball guide portions 202 are arranged at regular intervals. Of these, nine ball guide portions 202 are bottomed outlet guide portions 203 , and one ball guide portion 202 is bottomless V winning port guide portion 204 . The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined so as to become lower toward the outside. Each ball guide portion 202 is large enough to accommodate one game ball, and a game ball drawn out from the lead-out portion 186 of the guide passage 183 enters one of the ball guide portions 202 . In this case, the game ball entering the V winning opening guiding portion 204 reaches the upper portion of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls from the V winning opening 182a into the V winning passage 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the outlet passage 191b through the outlet 182b.

Further, in this embodiment, a rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided to detect the rotational position of the rotor 201 . The rotational position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other with a predetermined interval. A light-receiving element is arranged at a position facing each other. The rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided on a sensor substrate 197, and the sensor substrate 197 is provided between both arm portions 196a and 196b of the rotational position detection sensor 196 (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element). It is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so that a cut bang 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is positioned.

The cut bang 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element of the rotational position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut bang 198, and only when the notch 198a passes between the arms 196a and 196b as the output shaft 194a rotates, light from the light emitting element is emitted. of light reaches the light receiving element. A notch portion 198a is formed in correspondence with the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer circumference of the rotating body 201, so that it is possible to monitor whether or not the light receiving element has detected the light from the light emitting element. , the rotational position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes the front side of the lead-out portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between the arms 196a and 196b.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on one of the left and right sides of the guide passage 183, more specifically, on the left side of the guide passage 183 on which the outlet 182b is formed. . The first distribution member 300 is arranged as a bottom portion forming part of the floor portion of the guide passage 183 above the disengagement passage 191b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to a first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid). and a distribution state in which the rear end of the first distribution member 300 rotates downward with the rear end of the first distribution member 300 as a rotation axis and is inclined downward toward the disengagement passage 191b.

With the above configuration, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, the guide passage 183 is moved to the left. The distributed game balls pass over the first distribution member 300 using the first distribution member 300 as a floor portion and reach one of the ball guide portions 202 in the rotating body 201 . On the other hand, the first distribution driving unit 300a is driven (excited), and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, so that the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower disengagement passage 191b. However, the game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 does not reach the rotating body 201 and is guided to the disengagement passage 191b as it is. Therefore, the V winning probability (the probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distribution member 300. FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, a warp passage 210 is provided for guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 directly to the V winning passage 191a. The warp passage 210 includes a substantially cylindrical passage cover 211 and a passage forming portion 212 that partitions the inner space of the passage cover 211 into passages to form spherical passages. The passage cover 211 is made of a transparent (translucent) synthetic resin, and a spiral passage 213 is formed by the inner peripheral wall surface of the passage cover 211 and the passage forming portion 212 inside the passage cover 211 . . One game ball can pass through the spiral passage 213 .

An entrance guide portion 215 for guiding a game ball passing through the game ball passage 178 to the spiral passage 213 is provided on the upper portion of the passage cover 211 . The entrance guide portion 215 is arranged in a portion of the passage wall 183 a of the guide passage 183 corresponding to the rear portion of the ball distribution portion 185 . Specifically, the passage wall 183a has an opening (not shown) that opens rearward at a portion behind the ball distribution portion 185, and the entrance guide portion 215 is formed in the opening. The inlets are in communication. The exit portion of the entrance guide portion 215 communicates with the spiral passage 213 through the warp entrance portion 214 , and the floor surface of the entrance guide portion 215 slopes down toward the spiral passage 213 .

At the lower part of the passage cover 211, a warp exit portion 216 is formed for discharging game balls that have passed through the spiral passage 213 to the outside of the passage cover 211. As shown in FIG. In front of the warp exit portion 216, an exit guide portion 217 is provided that extends forward in a downwardly inclined manner and guides the game ball discharged from the warp exit portion 216 to the discharge passage forming member 191. ing. The discharge passage forming member 191 is formed with a V guide passage 260 that guides the game ball toward the V winning passage 191a. are in communication. The V-guiding passage 260 is formed so as to slope downward toward the V-winning passage 191a, and the front end 262 of the V-guiding passage 260 communicates with the V-winning passage 191a. Each of the warp entrance portion 214, the entrance guide portion 215, the warp exit portion 216, the exit guide portion 217, and the V guide passage 260 is configured so that one game ball can pass therethrough.

With the above configuration, when a game ball that has reached the guide path 183 is guided toward the warp path 210 , it passes through the spiral path 213 in the warp path 210 and is led out to the V guide path 260 . Then, the game ball passes through the V guiding path 260, enters the V winning path 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

Here, in front of the entrance guide portion 215 in the warp passage 210, game balls that have passed through the game ball passage 178 are placed on the entrance guide portion 215 (warp passage 210) side and the ball sorting portion 185 (left guide passage 183). A second distributing member 310 is provided that can be distributed to either side. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution drive section 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the second distribution drive section 310a is driven and controlled to move forward of the entrance guide section 215. It switches to a non-distribution state in which it is arranged and a distribution state in which it is arranged above it and is not arranged in front of the entrance guide part 215 .

Further, a shutter 221 for switching whether or not game balls flow into the warp entrance 214 is provided in the middle of the entrance guide 215 between the second distribution member 310 and the warp entrance 214 of the warp passage 210. is provided. The shutter 221 is connected to a shutter drive section 221a (electromagnetic solenoid), and is arranged in front of the entrance guide section 215 to open the warp entrance section 214 by driving and controlling the shutter drive section 221a. A closed state that restricts the inflow of game balls to (closes the warp inlet 214), and a closed state that is arranged above it and allows the inflow of game balls to the warp inlet 214 (closes the warp inlet 214). open) and switch to the open state.

With the above configuration, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (does not enter an excited state) and the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, the game ball is placed in the entrance guide unit 215. After being sorted to the ball sorting section 185 side, it goes down the guide passage 183 on the left side. On the other hand, when the second distribution driving portion 310a is driven (excited) and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball can flow into the entrance guide portion 215, and the entrance It is distributed to the guide section 215 side.

At that time, when the shutter driving portion 221a is driven (becomes in an excited state) and the shutter 221 is in an open state, the game ball on the entrance guide portion 215 passes through the warp entrance portion 214 and passes through the spiral path. 213, and is guided through the exit guide portion 217 and the V guide passage 260 to the V winning passage 191a. That is, V wins are won directly without going through distribution by the rotating body 201 . Conversely, when the shutter driving portion 221a is not driven (not in an excited state) and the shutter 221 is in a closed state, the game ball stops by coming into contact with the shutter 221, and the warp entrance portion 214 Inflow of game balls to is regulated. This state continues until the shutter 221 is opened, and game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 .

Here, both the second distribution member 310 and the rotating body 201 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but the second distributing member 310 is arranged behind the rotating body 201, is lower than the rotating body 201. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second distribution member 310 from being targeted at the timing of distribution to the entrance guide section 215 side. On the other hand, as for the rotating body 201, it is possible to make it easier to see how the game balls are distributed, and to increase the interest in the rotating body 201 and improve its presence.

In addition, the ball distribution part 185 in the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 has a backward downward slope so that the game balls can be distributed not only to the left side but also to the rear side. At this time, the second distribution member 310 in the non-distribution state is positioned in front of the downward slope surface (front side), so that the positional relationship with the downward slope surface is set. As a result, the second distribution member 310 in the non-distribution state suppresses the phenomenon that the game ball stays at the middle position of the downward slope.

In this embodiment, the period until the game balls stored in front of the warp inlet 214 pass through the warp passage 210 (spiral passage 213) and reach the V winning sensor 192 is set to about 2 seconds. The path length is set to . In addition, the length of the path and the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 are adjusted so that the period until the winning game ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 via the left guiding path 183 and the rotating body 201 is about 3 seconds. is set. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the exit opening 182b is located closer to the lead-out portion 186 than the V winning opening 182a when viewed in the rotating direction (clockwise) of the rotating body 201 . For this reason, the period until the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 passes through the guide passage 183 on the left side and the rotating body 201 and reaches the sensor 193 for loss (until it is discharged from the accessory device 150 via the sensor 193 for loss) period) is shorter than the period until it reaches the V winning sensor 192 via the left guide passage 183 and the rotating body 201 .

The game ball entering the accessory device 150 described above rolls on the ball receiving plate 163 to enter the game ball passage 178 . In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179 . A game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 reaches a ball sorting portion 185 formed in the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side. Then, on condition that the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, it is distributed to the left guide passage 183 . After that, it is guided to the lead-out portion 186 by rolling along the left guide passage 183 . The game ball guided to the lead-out portion 186 rolls along the slope of the lead-out portion 186 and is led out into the recess 182 . However, the condition that the game ball rolling in the left guidance passage 183 can reach the recess 182 is that the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state. In other words, the game ball guided to the left guide passage 183 may be led out to the recess 182 side, or may be led out to the exit 182b as it is.

The rotating body 201 rotates in the recess 182, and the game ball drawn into the recess 182 and entering the outlet guide section 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the missing sensor 193 . On the other hand, the game ball drawn into the concave portion 182 and entering the V winning opening guiding portion 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 .

When the game ball reaches the ball distribution section 185 and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. In the present embodiment, when the game ball reaches the ball sorting portion 185 while the second sorting member 310 is in the sorting state, the ball is always sorted to the entrance guide portion 215 side. The shape of the distribution part 185 is set. When the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side and the shutter 221 is in the closed state, the game is played at the contact position (upstream of the warp entrance portion 214) to the shutter 221 as already described. The ball stops and is stored in the accessory device 150 in that state. After that, when the shutter 221 is displaced to the open state, the game ball flows into the spiral passage 213 through the warp inlet 214 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192 .

Since only one of the ten ball guides 202 has the V winning opening guide portion 204, the game ball that enters the concave portion 182 of the accessory device 150 has a probability of 1/10 reaching the V winning opening 182a. will enter. In addition, when game balls are detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the sensor 193 for losing, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 71 . Furthermore, the movement of the game ball on the rotating body unit 180 is visible from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161 .

However, the number of ball guide portions 202 and the number of V winning opening guide portions 204 are not limited to those described above. A configuration may be adopted in which V prizes are awarded with a probability of /6, or a configuration in which V prizes are awarded with another probability.

The power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc. and the drive units 173, 221a, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. It is connected to terminal board 199 . These signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device which will be described later. However, it is good also as a structure which performs these part or all in the production|presentation control-apparatus side mentioned later which is a sub-side control apparatus.

The symbol display device 51 notifies that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38 and 39 and the accessory device 150 is in an open state, notifies that a game ball enters the accessory device 150, In addition to the notification during the normal game state, such as notification of the result of distribution, notification of the distribution situation in the rotating body 201, detection of the game ball by the V prize sensor 192 and notification of the occurrence of the big win state, etc. It also performs notification of the middle round effect and error notification when an abnormality is detected. It should be noted that the contents of these presentations are sufficient as long as the player can clearly grasp the respective game situations.

Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the game board 24 is provided with a vibration detection sensor 240 and a magnet detection sensor 241 as abnormality detection means. A vibration detection sensor 240 and a magnet detection sensor 241 are installed around the accessory device 150 . These detection sensors 240 and 241 are electrically connected to the main controller 81, and detect vibration and magnetism (magnetism) in a situation where operating power (operating voltage) is supplied from the main controller 81. The detection result is output to main controller 81 .

As already explained, since the accessory device 150 sorts out the V winning prizes, the flow of the game balls is changed by vibrating the accessory device 150 or by attracting the game balls with magnets. A fraudulent act to guide the ball to the V winning hole guide section 204 is assumed. On the other hand, since the detection sensors 240 and 241 are provided, it is possible to grasp when the fraudulent act is performed.

The positions of the detection sensors 240 and 241 are arbitrary as long as vibration and magnetism can be detected. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing fraudulent acts on the role-thing device 150, it is preferable to arrange it closer to the role-thing device 150. FIG.

The main controller 81 to which the detection sensors 240 and 241 are connected has a game stop function of stopping the subsequent game when the detection sensors 240 and 241 detect vibration or magnetism.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the board box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated from each other. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The performance control device 82 is provided with a performance control board that controls a display control device (not shown) as well as voice and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 81. The performance control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 and configured.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91 to which a payout mechanism 92 and a controller assembly unit 93 are attached. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . A back pack substrate 92a is installed in the dispensing mechanism section 92 (see FIG. 5). A main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied to the back pack board 92a, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or off by switching the power switch 92b.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a game is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body 12 of the game machine is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Then, through these output terminals, signals regarding the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game arcade side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The controller assembly unit 93 comprises a payout controller 97 and a power supply and launch controller 98 . The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 60 is controlled. The power and firing control unit 98 is provided with a RAM erase switch 98a (see FIG. 5). The pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure is retained, and upon recovery from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It's becoming Therefore, if the power supply is cut off by operating only the power switch 92b as in the case of closing the business of the amusement arcade, the state before the cutoff is stored and held. When the power is turned on, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

A main control device 81, an effect control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as already described, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power supply and a firing control. A device 98 is mounted.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. In the main controller 81, the board box housing the main control board 111 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the connecting part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 112 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main controller 81 and a payout controller 97 . In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115 , and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115 .

Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112 . Various sensors include a first actuation sensor 38a and a second actuation sensor 39c that detect winning to both actuation openings 38 and 39, and a general winning opening as a winning detection sensor that detects winning to other ball entry sections. A sensor 35a for detecting winning to 35 and a sensor 41a for detecting winning to through gate 41 are provided. Various sensors include an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, an exit sensor 193, a rotational position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150. FIG. In the MPU 112, based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196, the winning judgment (ball entry judgment) to each ball entry section is performed, and the position of the rotating body 201 is determined. Grasping. Also, in the MPU 112, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first actuation opening 38 or the second actuation opening 39. FIG. Furthermore, the various sensors include a vibration detection sensor 240 that detects vibrations and a magnet detection sensor 241 that detects magnets. The MPU 112 performs abnormality monitoring based on the detection results of these detection sensors 240 and 241 .

An output side of the MPU 112 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, as various drive units, an electric accessory drive unit 39b, an open/close accessory drive unit 173, a first apportionment drive unit 300a, a second apportionment drive unit 310a, a shutter drive unit 221a, a rotation A body drive unit 194 and the like are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a prize is awarded to one of the operation ports 38, 39, or when the V prize sensor 192 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode based on the prize winning, the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under control, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed. Further, in these cases, drive control of both distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, or drive control of the rotor drive unit 194 is performed.

Further, when a winning lottery based on the winning of both operation ports 38 and 39 is performed, the MPU 112 controls the display of the main display section 43 . Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 39a is to be specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112 .

The blackout monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power and launch control 98 and also monitors the output of the power and launch control 98 at a stable 24 volt DC voltage. The power failure monitoring board 115 determines that a power failure (power shutdown) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 98 becomes less than 22 volts, and sends a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt pin). As a result, main controller 81 recognizes the occurrence of power failure, immediately executes NMI interrupt processing, and further executes power failure processing based on this. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81 .

Further, the power supply and shooting control device 98 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34, and the game ball is fired by supplying a drive signal from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid fired.

The performance control device 82 has a performance control board 141 on which an MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 142, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 143. A RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 142 drives and controls various light emitting units 54 to 56 and 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on commands received from the main control device 81 . In addition, the command as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control device 100 . Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157 are mounted. It has

The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 155).

The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by the MPU 152, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is.

The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 51 . Since the VDP 155 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 152 and the video RAM 157 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 156 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 51 . The character ROM 156 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 51 , and the display content of the pattern display device 51 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 157 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries in MPU 112 of Main Control Unit 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various types of counter information to set the jackpot lottery, set the display of the main display section 43, set the display of the symbols of the pattern display device 51, set the display of the character display section 44, and the like. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, and a jackpot type used to determine the jackpot type, such as whether or not to execute opening and closing of the opening/closing accessory 168. A type counter C2, an opening type counter CS for setting a waiting period from the winning to the opening state when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, A random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second operation port 39 is to be in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 . In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the release type counter CS is stored as acquired information when a prize is won in the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as means.

The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE including a first result display section reserved area Ra and a second result display section reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb each have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning to the first working opening 38 or the second working opening 39 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area → second area → third area → Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 are reserved and stored. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 114b. Information for specifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 43, and when starting one game cycle, the execution area AE is moved. Based on the various numerical information stored in the .

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 38 or the second operation opening 39. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display section reservation area Rb.

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a result table (game result information group) in a result table storage area 113a as win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 113 .

Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG. 12(a).

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the result table, as the game results, a missing result, a direct hit result, and a normal open result are set. The normal open result is a game result in which the opening/closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is brought into an open state (opening/closing execution mode) based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 . In this embodiment, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened once when the first operation port 38 is won, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened twice when the second operation port 39 is won. is set to be The deviation result is the result that the opening/closing accessory 168 is not in the open state even when the operation openings 38 and 39 are won. In this case, it is not possible to cause the accessory device 150 to win, and a shift to the jackpot state (opening/closing execution mode) cannot be expected. A direct hit result is a result of shifting to a big win state (opening/closing execution mode) just by winning a prize to the operation openings 38 and 39, and even if a V prize does not occur as well as a prize to the accessory device 150. , to the jackpot state as described above.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the opening/closing execution mode based on the normal opening result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result (including both direct hit result and V winning), the former is called "first opening/closing execution mode", and the latter is sometimes called "second opening/closing execution mode".

Of the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that result in an outlier is 1, the number of random number values that result in a direct hit is 1, and the rest are normal open results. corresponding values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of opening/closing accessories 168 corresponding to the operation openings 38 and 39 is opened with a probability of 98/100 based on the winning of both the operation openings 38 and 39, and the number of open/close accessories 168 corresponding to the operation openings 38 and 39 is 1/100. Although the opening/closing accessory 168 is not opened with a probability of 1/100, the opening/closing accessory 168 is not opened and the opening/closing execution mode is entered without passing the V prize. migration is not performed.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which is not provided with a direct hit result and a miss result. However, by including these results, it is possible to diversify the game, and especially if a direct hit result is provided, a game in which winning of the accessory device 150 does not occur frequently due to nail adjustment or the like. Even if it is a machine, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a big winning state, and even if it is such a game machine, it is possible to anticipate the effect of increasing the motivation to play.

The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 38 or the second operation opening 39. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display section reservation area Rb.

Random number values for setting the types of jackpot results are stored as a type table (game type information group) in various table storage area 113 d as win/fail information group storage means in ROM 113 .

Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b).

As shown in FIG. 12(b), in the type table, a 16R (round) continuation mode and a continuation rate variation mode are set as the types of jackpot results. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate fluctuation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game fluctuates in the round game.

Here, the round game means (1) that the opening/closing accessory 168 has been opened a predetermined upper limit number of times (in other words, the total opening time reaches the predetermined upper limit opening time). , (2) that the total number of winning game balls into the accessory device 150 reaches a predetermined upper limit number, or (2) the game continues until either one of the conditions is satisfied. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened and closed 19 times in one round game, and the upper limit winning number of one round game is set to nine.

The maximum number of round games performed in each jackpot type is predetermined, and specifically, the maximum round game is set to 16 times regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, the 16R continuation mode is set so that 16 round games are unconditionally continued. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that the game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the round game and that the game ball wins V.

The release type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The release type counter CS is updated periodically. However, this update timing is set to be a timing different from the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2. As a result, it is difficult for fraudulent acts to read the update timing of each counter value by some method. The updated open type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 38 or the second operation opening 39, like the other counters C1 and C2. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display section reservation area Rb.

The value of the random number that sets the waiting time (opening timing) from the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 to the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c as standby information group storage means in the ROM 113. (waiting period information group).

Here, the contents of the opening timing table will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c).

As shown in FIG. 12(c), as the opening timing, a plurality of types of waiting time (waiting period) from the winning timing to the operation ports 38 and 39 (or closing timing of the previous opening/closing accessory 168) are set. ing. More specifically, 20 kinds of waiting times are set in increments of 0.1 sec from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec. The interval (0.1 sec) between these times is set to be shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec cycle). It is becoming difficult to intentionally change (increase) the probability.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. - 特許庁

Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to open state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 39a is set to be the same regardless of the game state. That is, a state in which it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a or in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are large in the case of winning (so-called high-frequency support mode), or in which the probability of winning in the opening lottery is lower than that, or the opening in the case of winning A mode such as a state in which the time and the number of openings is small (so-called low-frequency support mode) is not provided. With a configuration having these modes, it is possible to improve the interest because the range of increase and decrease in the number of balls thrown can be increased. Circumstances may arise in which it is necessary to adopt specifications such as setting the winning frequency to both operation ports 38 and 39 low. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, it is difficult for the players to win prizes in the operation ports 38 and 39, and there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may decrease. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the game state, it is possible to expect a certain degree of winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 even in the normal game state. It is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation for games.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described. The processing of the MPU 112 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to advance the game, and NMI that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then main processing and normal processing will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
First, NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power outage or the like. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. . In the NMI interrupt process, in step S100, a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and this process ends. After that, when it is confirmed that the power failure flag is set in the normal process, which will be described later, the power failure process is executed. The processing will be described later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In the subsequent step S102, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114. FIG.

In the subsequent step S103, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (game stopped state). Determination of whether or not the game is in the stopped state is made on the condition that the game stopped flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. When it is determined that the game is in the stopped state, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the stopped state, then in step S104, various detection sensors are read. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, 240, and 241 are read, the states of these various detection sensors are determined, and the detection information is stored. do. In addition, when the winning of the game ball is detected by various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball is detected. Sets the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects that a prize has been won in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set.

In the subsequent step S105, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 41 is executed. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 41, the number of stored role product reserves stored in the electricity reserve area 114c is less than the upper limit (for example, "4"). On this condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S102 is stored in the electric role holding area 114c. In addition, the production control device 82 executes a process for lighting the third pending light-emitting portion 56 corresponding to the number of stored character product pending storage.

In the subsequent step S106, a prize winning process for the operation opening is executed. In the winning process for the operation opening, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in either of the operation openings 38,39. Then, when it is determined that a prize has been won, numerical information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time is acquired, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a. The details of the prize winning process for the operating port will be described later.

After that, in step S107, the abnormality monitoring process is executed, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the abnormality monitoring process, the detection results of the vibration detection sensor 240 and the magnet detection sensor 241 are referenced to determine whether or not there is vibration detection or magnet detection, or whether or not there is a remaining ball abnormality in the accessory device 150 . Details of the abnormality monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the winning process for the operation opening in step S106 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

In step S201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operation opening 38 whether or not the game ball has won the first operation opening 38 (start winning). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set. In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first operation hole 38 to the management control device on the gaming arcade side. In step S204, the value stored in the retention number storage area of the first result display section retention area Ra is read, and the starting retention storage number RaN retained and stored in the first result display section retention area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start pending storage number RaN). In the subsequent step S205, a process of setting the number of opening times of the opening/closing accessory 168 to one is executed. Specifically, a process of setting "1" to the open number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. After that, in step S206, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is performed, and the winning process ends.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operation opening 38, in step S207, the second operation opening 39 determines whether the game ball has won the second operation opening 39 (start winning). Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to . When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operation port 39, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set in step S208. In subsequent step S209, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming arcade side that the game ball has won the second operation hole 39. FIG. In step S210, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is read, and the start-up reservation number RbN reserved and stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start pending storage number RbN). In the subsequent step S211, a process of setting the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 to two is executed. Specifically, a process of setting "2" to the above-described opening number counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the process of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening/closing accessory 168 will not be opened due to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as described above. After that, information acquisition processing is performed in step S206, and the prize winning processing ends.

On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S207 are NO, that is, if the game ball does not enter either the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, the winning process is terminated.

Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in steps S202 and S208 are transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process of step S603 in the normal process (see FIG. 19) to be described later.

Here, the information acquisition processing in step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start pending storage set in step S204 or step S210 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). judge. If the starting pending memory number N is equal to the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is. While incrementing by one, the value (hereinafter referred to as common pending number CRN) stored in the total pending number storage area in step S303 is also incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in the above step S102 and the value of the open type counter CS updated in the normal process described later are stored in the corresponding empty space of the result display section reservation area. It is stored in the first storage area of the storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by one in step S302.

In other words, when the starting reservation storage number RaN for the first working port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first working port is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas, that is, the start suspension storage number RaN for the first working port incremented by one in step S302 and the corresponding suspension area Ra.

In addition, when the start reservation storage number RbN for the second working port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second working port is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the start suspension storage number RbN for the second working port incremented by one in step S302 and the corresponding suspension area Rb. After executing the process of step S304, the information acquisition process ends.

Next, the abnormality monitoring process of step S107 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 240 or not. If vibration is detected, a vibration detection flag is stored in various flag storage area 114e of RAM 114 in step S402. In the following step S403, the vibration detection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. A vibration detection command is a command for making the production|presentation control apparatus 82 recognize having specified the detection of the vibration in MPU112. The vibration detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in external output processing of normal processing to be described later. In the subsequent step S404, external output processing for abnormality is executed to output a signal to the management control device on the game arcade side that the detection of vibration has been specified.

If no vibration is detected in step S401, or after executing the abnormality external output process in step S404, it is determined in step S405 whether or not the magnet detection sensor 241 detects a magnet. When the magnet is detected, the magnet detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S406, and the magnet detection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the subsequent step S407. do. A magnet detection command is a command for making the production|presentation control apparatus 82 recognize having specified the detection of the magnet in MPU112. The magnet detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in external output processing of normal processing to be described later. In the following step S408, external output processing for abnormality is executed to output a signal to the management control device on the amusement arcade side that the detection of the magnet has been specified.

If the magnet is not detected in step S405, or after executing the abnormality external output process in step S408, in step S409, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball flag is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. determine whether The remaining ball flag indicates that a game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the presence of the game ball is confirmed even though the game ball should not exist in the accessory device 150. is stored when If the remaining ball flag is not stored, the abnormality monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the remaining ball flag is stored, the remaining detection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S410. The residual detection command is a command for making the effect control device 82 recognize that the MPU 112 has specified the detection of the residual ball. The remaining detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process to be described later. In the subsequent step S411, an abnormality external output process is executed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the detection of the remaining ball has been specified, and the abnormality monitoring process ends.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (payout control device 97, etc.) to become operable. In the subsequent step S502, access to the RAM 114 is permitted.

After that, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 98a provided in the power supply and launch control device 98 is turned on. determine whether or not If the power failure flag is stored, the RAM judgment value is calculated in step S505, and in the subsequent step S506, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown. determine the validity of the data obtained. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 114 . It is also possible to judge the validity of the stored data by checking whether the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 114 is correctly stored.

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 98a. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed (YES at step S503), the process proceeds to steps S507 to S509. In addition, when the power failure flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and the occurrence information of the power shutdown is not set (the result of step S504 is NO), or the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) Also when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed (NO in step S506), the process proceeds to steps S507 to S509.

In step S507, an initialization command is output to initialize the sub-side control device (payout control device 97, etc.). In the following step S508, the used area of the RAM 114 is cleared to 0, and in step S509 the RAM 114 is initialized. After that, in step S516, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 98a is not pressed, on the condition that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, various data in the RAM 114 are deleted in step S510. Clear the power failure flag stored in the flag storage area 114e. In the following step S511, a power recovery command is output for returning the sub-side control device (payout control device 97, etc.) to the gaming state before the power shutdown.

In the subsequent step S512, it is determined whether or not an abnormality detection flag (a vibration detection flag, a magnet detection flag, a remaining ball flag) is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. If the abnormality detection flag is stored, the abnormality detection flag is cleared in step S513 to cancel the abnormality detection state.

If the abnormality detection flag is not stored in step S512, or after canceling the abnormality detection state in step S513, in step S514, whether or not the game stop state is set based on the game stop flag of the RAM 114 judge.

When the game stop state is set, at step S515, the game stop flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to cancel the game stop state. Specifically, the discharge stop processing for prohibiting the discharge of game balls, the payout stop processing for stopping the payout of game balls by the payout device 96, and the like are canceled. After that, in step S516, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later. As a result, the state before the power shutdown is restored. At this time, if vibrations, magnets, detection of remaining balls, and game stop state have been set before the power is shut off, the game returns to the state in which they are cancelled.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the processing of steps S601 to S610 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S612 and S613 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, game stop determination processing is executed in step S601. In the game stop determination process, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, the game stop process is executed. Details of the game stop processing will be described later.

In the following step S602, it is determined whether or not the game is in the stopped state, and on the condition that the game is not in the stopped state, the processing of steps S603 to S609 is executed. In step S603, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . Moreover, when command for production|presentation, a vibration detection command, a magnet detection command, and a residual detection command are set, it is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. FIG.

Next, in step S604, the release type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the release type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114 .

In the subsequent step S605, a game control process is executed to advance the game. In the game control process, drive control (first opening/closing execution mode) of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 is performed. After executing the game control process of step S605, it progresses to step S606 and executes a game state transition process. By this game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the second opening/closing execution mode. Details of the game control process in step S605 and the game state transition process in step S606 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S607, a remaining ball determination process for specifying the remaining state of game balls in the accessory device 150 is executed. In the remaining ball determination process, it is determined whether or not the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 has not been properly discharged due to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and remains in the accessory device 150. . The details of the remaining ball determination process will be described later.

After step S607 is executed, in step S608, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operation port 39 is executed. In the electric role support process, an electric role release lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric role product 39a using numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114. , and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 39a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

Thereafter, in step S609, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

When it is determined that the game is stopped in step S602, or after executing the game ball shooting control process in step S609, in step S610, whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. judge.

If the power failure flag is not stored, in step S611 it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. determine whether Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the release type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process (steps S612 and S613). That is, in step S612, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S613, the release type counter CS is updated.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S601 to S609 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The release type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that the power failure flag is stored, it means that the power has been shut off due to power failure, so the power failure processing from step S614 onwards is executed. That is, in step S614, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and then in step S615, a power failure command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is output to the sub-side control device (payout control device 97, etc.).

Then, in step S616, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S617, access to the RAM 114 is prohibited. After that, the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Even after the power supply is completely cut off, the power supply and launch control device 98 continues to supply power for storing data in the RAM 114. It is held as it is for a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days).

<Game stop determination processing>
Next, the game stop determination process of step S601 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game stop determination process, in steps S701 to S703, it is determined whether or not the vibration detection flag, the magnet detection flag, or the remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the vibration has been detected, whether the magnet has been detected, and whether the existence of the remaining balls has been identified. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, this game stop determination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, a closing control process for displacing the electric accessory 39a and the accessory device 150 (opening/closing accessory 168) to the closed state is executed. Thereby, when the electric accessory 39a or the accessory device 150 is being opened, it is forcibly closed.

In the following step S705, a firing stop process is performed to switch the firing permission signal to the power supply and firing control device 98 to LOW level to prohibit the firing of the game ball, and further, in step S706, other canceling processes are performed. For example, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 97 to stop the payout of game balls by the payout device 96 . Also, a game stop command is output to the effect control device 82 to stop the effect display and the like on the pattern display device 51 . After execution of step S706, in step S707, the game stop flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of RAM114, and a game stop state is set. After that, the game stop determination process is terminated.

By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, both affirmative determination in step S103 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and step S602 of the normal process (FIG. 19) executed thereafter will be done. If an affirmative determination is made in those steps, the processing of steps S104 to S107 and the processing of steps S604 to S609 are skipped. These processes are substantially processes for progressing the game, and by skipping these processes, the progress of the game can be stopped.

Incidentally, even when the game is stopped, the process of updating the various lottery counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 is continued without being skipped (steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 14 and step S612 in FIG. 19). , S613). As a result, the updating of the various lottery counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 can be continued even during the game stop state. In this configuration, even if the RAM erase switch 98a is operated and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the initialization of the various lottery counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 is not executed, and the game is stopped. It is more effective when applied to a configuration that does not require initialization of the RAM 114 when canceling the state.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control processing of step S605 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG.

In the game control process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the direct hit result or V winning) is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second open/close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . The second opening/closing execution mode flag indicates that the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed. It is erased when the second open/close execution mode is ended in the game state transition process.

If it is in the second opening/closing execution mode, the processing after step S802, that is, the processing for starting the game in steps S803 to S806, the processing for progressing the game in steps S808 to S810, and the processing for ending the game in steps S811 to S813. This game control process is terminated without executing any of the above. In other words, when the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the game starts regardless of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the operation ports 38 and 39 (a role triggered by the winning of the operation ports 38 and 38). (opening of device 150).

If it is not in the second opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode (an opening/closing execution mode based on the result of normal opening) is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . The first opening/closing execution mode flag indicates that the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed. ), and is erased upon completion of the operation of the accessory device 150 based on the result (including the waiting period after closing).

If it is not in the first opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to the game start processing of steps S803 to S806. In the game start process, first, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the common reservation number CRN is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 38 and the second operation port 39. FIG. Therefore, the game control process is terminated as it is. When the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S804, data stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb is set for the lottery process. In addition, in step S805, a success/fail judgment process for judging the game result of the data set in the data setting process is executed. After that, in step S806, control start processing for starting control of the accessory device 150 is executed, and then the game control processing is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S804, the validity determination process in step S805, and the control start process in step S806 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first result display section of steps S902 to S907 is executed, and if the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0" executes data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S908 to S913.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is "0". If stored, the data stored in the second result display holding area Rb is set for lottery processing regardless of whether the first start holding storage number RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when the reservation information is stored in both the first result display section reservation area Ra and the second result display section reservation area Rb, the second result display section for the second result display section corresponding to the second operation opening 39 Priority is given to the pending information stored in the pending area Rb.

In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S902, the first start reservation storage number RaN in the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S903, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S904, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In subsequent step S906, the second result display flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is stored, it is erased; if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display section flag is used to specify which of the reservation information in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb corresponds to the object of this pass/fail judgment. information.

In the following step S907, a shift time command (shift occurrence information) is set which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first result display section reservation area Ra, that is, the first operation port 38 A shift-time command including information of correspondence is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.例文帳に追加After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set at step S907 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display in the first pending light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the pending number based on the received shift time command.

In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S908, the second start reservation storage number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S909, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S910, the data stored in the first area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display portion reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In subsequent step S912, the second result display flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is not stored, the second result display flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the following step S913, a shift time command (shift generation information) is set which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second result display section reserved area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second operation port 39 A shift-time command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.例文帳に追加After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set at step S913 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display in the second pending light emitting unit 55 in accordance with the decrease in the pending number, based on the received shift time command.

Next, the success/failure determination process in step S805 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, the data (jackpot random number counter C1) shifted to the execution area AE this time and the result table of the ROM 113 are referenced to determine whether or not the current game result is a direct hit result. If it is a direct hit result, the process advances to step S1102 to execute processing for storing the V prize flag in the various flag storage area 114e. The V winning flag originally indicates that the passage of the game ball has been detected by the V winning sensor 192, but here it functions as a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp the occurrence of the second opening execution mode. do.

In the following step S1103, a direct hit command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S1103, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to a direct hit is executed. After that, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

The direct hit command set at step S1103 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for the start effect of the opening/closing execution mode based on the direct hit command received.

If it is not a direct hit result in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, the data shifted to the execution area AE this time (jackpot random number counter C1) and the result table of the ROM 113 are referenced to determine whether or not the current game result is a losing result. If the result is out, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value set in the opening number counter in step S205 or step S211 in the winning process for the operation port (FIG. 15) is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S1106, the off command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S1106, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the result of deviation is executed. After that, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

The off command set at step S1106 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The performance control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 will not be in the open state based on the received out command.

If it is not the result of the disconnection in step S1104, it means that the result of the judgment of right or wrong this time is the result of the normal opening. In this case, in step S1107, the normal opening command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S1107, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the result of normal opening is executed. After that, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

The normal opening command set at step S1107 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in the open state based on the received normal open command. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning/failure determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 .

Next, the control start processing in step S806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the control start process, first, in step S1201, the opening number counter in the RAM 114 is referred to, and the opening number of the opening/closing accessory 168 is grasped. In subsequent step S1202, an opening/closing timing setting process is executed. In the opening/closing timing setting process, among the data shifted to the execution area AE in the data setting process (FIG. 22), the data relating to the opening timing, that is, the value of the opening type counter CS and the opening timing table stored in the ROM 113 are used. , and sets the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 this time. Specifically, from this process, after how many seconds the opening and closing accessory 168 is to be opened (whether to start driving control of the opening and closing accessory driving unit 173) is read from the opening timing table, and stored in the RAM 114. Input to the standby counter provided in the various counter areas 114d. This waiting counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is possible to grasp that it is time to open the opening/closing accessory 168 .

In subsequent step S1203, a first distribution setting process for setting the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 (see FIG. 8) is executed. In the first distribution setting process of step S1203, the first distribution member 300 maintains a non-distribution state (a state in which the game ball is not distributed to the exit 182b side) during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode. Set the above operation mode. That is, in the present embodiment, all of the game balls that have won prizes in the accessory device 150 and are guided to the left guidance passage 183 by the ball sorting section 185 during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode reach the rotating body 201. will be. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to provide an opportunity to be guided to the exit 182b without reaching the end.

Next, in step S1204, a second distribution setting process for setting the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 (see FIG. 8) is executed. ) is executed to set the operation mode. In the second distribution setting process of step S1204, the second distribution member 310 maintains a non-distribution state (a state in which the game balls are not distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side) during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode. 2, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set. Further, in the shutter setting process of step S1205, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 maintains the closed state (the state in which the warp inlet 214 is closed) during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the first open/close execution mode, the route through the warp path 210 is cut off, and the rotating body 201 is exclusively used for a distribution lottery to determine whether or not a V prize is won. For example, the route through the warp path 210 is released during a part of the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode (the second distribution member 310 is placed in the distribution state and the shutter 221 is is in an open state), an opportunity may be provided in which the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 is led to the V winning port 182a without passing through the rotating body 201.

After execution of step S1205, in step S1206, setting processing for the rotating body for setting the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is performed. In the rotating body setting process of step S1206, the setting for returning the rotating body 201 to the initial position (the position where the V winning opening guide portion 204 faces the lead-out portion 186), and the rotating body 201 after returning to the initial position. The rotation start timing for starting rotation, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 that started rotation, and the like are set. In the present embodiment, the rotating body 201 starts rotating from the initial position at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has passed since the operation openings 38 and 39 that triggered the execution of the first opening/closing execution mode. After that, the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so that the rotation of one rotation in about 5 seconds is continuously repeated until at least the end of the first opening/closing execution mode. After execution of step S1206, this control start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game control process in FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S802 that the game is in the first opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the end waiting time has elapsed. The waiting time at the end is a period for waiting for the end of the first opening/closing execution mode after the opening/closing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is finished. The processing for setting the waiting time at the end will be described later.

If the waiting time at the end has not elapsed, the game progress processing of steps S808 to S810 is executed. In the game progress process, the process during control is executed in step S808, the process for the action part inside the role product is executed in step S809, and the winning process is executed in the following step S810, and then the game control process is terminated. do.

First, the processing during control in step S808 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing accessory 168 . In this determination, by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S1202, it can be confirmed whether or not it is the opening timing. If it is the opening timing in step S1301, opening control processing is executed in step S1302. In this process, the opening and closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing accessory 168 to the open state. Also, in step S1302, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current open period (uniformly 0.5 sec in this embodiment) to the open period counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The opening period counter is updated (decremented) at a predetermined cycle, and becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that it is possible to grasp the closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168.

Then, in subsequent step S1303, a process of subtracting "1" from the open number counter of RAM 114 is executed. In the subsequent step S1304, the opening number counter of the RAM 114 is referenced to determine whether or not it is the first opening in the first opening/closing execution mode. If it is the first opening, in step S1305, the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and then this in-control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the door is not opened for the first time, that is, if the door is opened for the second time in the two-time opening, the process during this control is terminated.

If it is not the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S1306, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing accessory 168 . In this process, by referring to the value of the open period counter input in step S1302, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the closing timing. If it is the closing timing in step S1306, a closing control process is executed in step S1307. In this process, by ending the drive control of the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173, the opening and closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

In the subsequent step S1308, the open number counter of the RAM 114 is referenced to determine whether or not the remaining open number is "0". If it is "0", in step S1309, a process for setting the standby time at the end is executed.

As already explained, the waiting time at the end is a period for waiting for the end of the first opening/closing execution mode after the opening/closing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is finished. The standby time is set in consideration of the period until the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 is discharged from the accessory device 150 . In the present embodiment, the period until the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the left guide passage 183 and the rotating body 201 is set to about 3 seconds, but the waiting time at the end is set to about 3 sec. The time is set to a predetermined period longer than this (uniformly 3.5 sec in this embodiment). With such a configuration, even if a game ball wins just before the accessory device 150 closes, it is possible to expect a big win based on the V win.

In step S1309, a process of inputting a value corresponding to 3.5 sec to the end waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. Since the termination standby time counter is updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the termination standby time counter becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0"). It becomes possible to grasp that the waiting time has passed.

If the number of times of opening is not "0" in step S1308, that is, if the second opening in the two times opening remains, in step S1310, the standby time (closed time) is set. In the process of step S1310, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current waiting time (uniformly 1 sec in this embodiment) to the waiting time counter of RAM 114 is executed.

If it is not the closing timing in step S1306, after executing the process of step S1309 or after executing the process of step S1310, this in-control process ends.

Next, the processing for the internal role product action section in step S809 in the game control processing (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S<b>1401 , it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the first distribution member 300 . If it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1402. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state.

If it is not the time to displace the first distribution member 300 in step S1401, or if the process of step S1402 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S<b>1403 , it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the second distribution member 310 . If it is the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive section 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state.

As already described, in the present embodiment, both the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are set to be maintained in the non-distribution state in the first opening/closing execution mode (see FIG. 24). (steps S1203 and S1204), and the determinations of steps S1401 and S1403 in the first opening/closing execution mode always result in a negative determination, and the processes of steps S1402 and S1404 are not executed.

If it is not the time to displace the second distribution member 310 in step S1403, or if the process of step S1404 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the shutter 221 . If it is the displacement timing, shutter control processing is executed in step S1406. In this process, the process of changing the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Further, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state.

Since the shutter 221 is also set to remain closed in the first opening/closing execution mode (step S1205 in FIG. 24), the determination in step S1405 in the first opening/closing execution mode is always negative. Therefore, the process of step S1406 is not executed.

After execution of step S1406, rotating body control processing is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the driving state of the rotating body drive section 194 is controlled in order to drive and control the rotating body 201 according to the setting contents (step S1206 in FIG. 24) described above. After execution of step S1407, the processing for the internal role product action unit ends.

Next, the winning process of step S810 in the game control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1501, the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the accessory device 150. FIG. When winning, in step S1502, the winning command within the role is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device . The winning command within the role item set at step S1502 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The performance control device 82 notifies that a prize has been won in the role product device 150 (notification for drawing attention to the motion of the game ball in the role product device 150) based on the received prize-winning command within the role product. process for

In the subsequent step S1503, a process of incrementing by one the remaining ball counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. This remaining ball counter RPC is for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of game balls existing in the accessory device 150 .

If it is determined in step S1501 that no prize has been awarded to the accessory device 150, or if the process of step S1503 has been executed, then in step S1504 the V prize sensor 192 detects the passing of the game ball (the occurrence of the V prize). ) is detected. When the occurrence of the V prize is detected, the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1505. In the subsequent step S1506, a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 by one is executed. That is, when the occurrence of the V prize is detected in step S1504, it means that a game ball has been discharged from the accessory device 150 in addition to the occurrence of the V prize. The number of game balls in the object device 150 is updated. After execution of step S1506, the winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the occurrence of V winning is not detected in step S1504, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not the passing (missing) of the game ball is detected by the sensor 193 for loss. If it is detected that the ball has come off, the process advances to step S1506 to execute a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC by one. In other words, even if the game ball is detected to be out, it means that the game ball has been ejected from the accessory device 150. The number of game balls in 150 is updated. On the other hand, if no loss is detected in step S1507, that is, if neither V winning nor loss is specified, the winning process is terminated without updating the remaining ball counter RPC.

Returning to the description of the game control process in FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S807 that the end waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S811, and the game end process of steps S811 to S813 is executed. In addition, under the condition that the waiting time at the end is not set, a negative determination is made in step S807, and the above-described game progress processing of steps S808 to S810 is executed.

In the game ending process, first, in step S811, a process of clearing the first open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. In the following step S812, control end processing is executed. In this process, a process for terminating the control (first opening/closing execution mode) of the accessory device 150 for one set of reserved information is performed. Specifically, confirmation of the presence/absence of an error in each drive unit 173, 300a, 310a, 194, return processing to the initial position, and the like are performed.

Next, in step S813, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then the game control process is ended. The control end command set at step S813 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in normal processing (FIG. 19). Based on the received control end command, the effect control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S606 in the normal processing (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 28 to 35 and the like.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win) is being executed. If it is not in the second opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S1602 to determine whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the result of normal opening) is being executed. If the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the current game result corresponds to the transition to the second opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114 e of the RAM 114 . If the V winning flag is not stored, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

When the V winning flag is stored, the start processing of the second opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1604. In the start process, the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the second opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the same area 114e. Also, in step S1604, an opening waiting time (waiting period for start) for waiting without starting opening the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

In the following step S1605, type determination processing is executed to determine the type of the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, among the pending information stored in the execution area AE this time, while grasping the jackpot type counter C2, referring to the type table of the ROM 113, the type of the opening and closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuous mode or the continuation rate variation mode.

In subsequent step S1606, it is determined whether or not the current open/close execution mode is the 16R continuation mode based on the processing result of step S1605. If it is the 16R continuation mode, a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1607. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to recognize that the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode.

If the 16R continuation mode is not set in step S1606, or if the process of step S1607 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, "15" is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 114d of the RAM 114, and "19" is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the same various counter area 114d. . The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one second opening/closing execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 is the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. is a counter for counting

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first opening and closing execution mode when a direct hit or V winning occurs corresponds to the round game of the first round among the 16 round games, and from the round game after the second round The configuration is such that the second opening/closing execution mode is started. That is, the second round is the first round in the second opening/closing execution mode.

After execution of step S1608, setting processing for a rotating body is executed in step S1609. In the rotating body setting process, settings are made to return the rotating body 201 to the initial position (the position where the V winning opening guide portion 204 faces the lead-out portion 186), and the rotating body 201 starts rotating after returning to the initial position. The rotation start timing, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 that started rotation, and the like are set. In this embodiment, at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has passed from the opening start timing, the rotation from the initial position is started, and then the rotation is performed once in about 5 sec at least in the second opening/closing execution mode. The operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so as to continuously repeat until the end of .

In subsequent step S1610, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This opening command includes information as to whether it is the 16R continuation mode or the continuation rate variation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the pattern display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 100 controls the display of the pattern display device 51 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed.

In the subsequent step S1611, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game arcade side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

On the other hand, if it is in the second opening/closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, and the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. If the standby time for opening has passed, opening/closing processing is executed in step S1613.

Here, the opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the main opening/closing process is ended. Specifically, it is determined whether a round flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. The round flag is a flag indicating that the round game is being executed, is stored in the various flag storage area 114e at the start of the round game, and is erased at the end of the round game.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the round flag is not stored and the round game is not being played, it is checked in step S1703 whether the value of the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is "0". judge. The process of this step corresponds to the process of determining whether or not a closing time (waiting time) between round games, which will be described later, has elapsed.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main opening/closing process is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the RAM 114 stores a continuation flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. If the continuation flag is not stored and the opening/closing execution mode of this time is the continuation rate variation mode, the process of grasping the number of rounds is executed in step S1802. In this process, the value of the first round counter RC1 is referenced to determine which round of the open/close execution mode the round set in the current round setting process is. Then, in step S1803, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

In the round pattern table, as shown in FIG. 31, an opening/closing pattern for each round is defined in one second opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of types of opening/closing patterns are set for the opening/closing accessory 168 for each round, and an opening/closing pattern A, an opening/closing pattern B, an opening/closing pattern C, and an opening/closing pattern D are set.

A specific opening/closing mode for each of the opening/closing patterns A to D is specified in an opening/closing pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to (d), the opening/closing pattern table stores the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 in association with the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 in each round game. The opening and closing pattern table consists of the first game section in the beginning of the round game (1st to 6th opening), the second game section in the middle (7th to 13th opening), and the final stage (14th to 19th opening). It is divided into three game intervals (game periods) including the third game interval (open until the first time), and the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 is defined for each game interval.

For example, in the opening and closing pattern A, as shown in FIG. In the 7th to 13th opening times (RC2 = 13 to 7) belonging to the game section, the ball is opened for 1.5 seconds, which is longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds), and then closed for 0.5 seconds. (also called open/close pattern P1). Also, in the 14th to 19th times (RC2=6 to 1) belonging to the third game section, the door is opened for 0.5 sec and then closed for 1.5 sec (also referred to as opening/closing pattern P2). In the case of P1, the winning of the accessory device 150 is relatively easy to occur due to the relationship with the firing period, and in the case of P2, although it can occur, it is less likely to occur than in A1. In other words, the opening/closing pattern A makes it easy for the game ball to enter the accessory device 150 in the first game section and the second game section.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the opening/closing pattern B is set so that the second game interval is the opening/closing pattern P1, and the first and third game intervals are the opening/closing pattern P2. In other words, the opening/closing pattern B makes it easy for the game ball to enter the accessory device 150 in the second game section.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the opening/closing pattern C is set such that the first game section is the opening/closing pattern P1, and the second and third game sections are the opening/closing pattern P2. In other words, the opening/closing pattern C makes it easy for the game ball to win in the accessory device 150 in the first game section.

As shown in FIG. 32(d), the opening/closing pattern D is set such that the third game interval is the opening/closing pattern P1, and the first and second game intervals are the opening/closing pattern P2. In other words, the opening/closing pattern D makes it easy for the game ball to enter the accessory device 150 in the third game section.

Based on these, the winning characteristics of each round game will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1st to 13th opening), the round game has a prize winning characteristic A in which the game balls are likely to enter the accessory device 150, and the 3rd to 7th rounds in which the opening/closing pattern B is set, In the second game section (seventh to thirteenth openings), a round game having a prize winning characteristic B in which game balls are likely to win in the accessory device 150 is performed. In addition, in the 8th to 11th rounds of the round game in which the opening/closing pattern D is set, the winning characteristic is such that the game balls are likely to win in the accessory device 150 in the 3rd game section (14th to 19th opening). In the 12th round to 16th round game in which the opening/closing pattern C is set, the game ball is placed in the accessory device 150 in the first game section (1st to 6th opening). A round game having a prize winning characteristic C that facilitates a prize is obtained.

Returning to the description of the setting processing for each round (FIG. 30), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1803, processing for setting the corresponding round pattern (round opening/closing pattern) is executed in step S1804. Specifically, the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are provided with flag storage areas corresponding to the respective patterns A to D. For example, if the opening/closing pattern is A, the flags are stored in the corresponding areas.

If the continuation flag is stored in step S1801, or after the processing of step S1804 is executed, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, "9" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM114. The prize counter PC indicates the number of prizes won in one round game, and in this embodiment, the round game ends when nine game balls win in the accessory device 150 in one round game. . In the subsequent step S1806, a process of setting "19" to the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then in step S1807, the round flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. After execution of step S1807, this setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the opening/closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S1704, each opening setting process is executed in step S1705.

In each opening setting process, as specifically shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is stored. This process is the same as the process of step S1801. If the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate variation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, the second round counter RC2 is grasped to grasp how many times the open/close accessory 168 is opened this time in one round. Then, in step S1903, the opening/closing pattern table (FIGS. 32A to 32D) stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to, and in step S1904, the opening number grasped in step S1902 is determined. The opening/closing patterns P1 and P2 corresponding to are set.

In the subsequent step S1905, the allocation pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to. Here, the distribution pattern table will be described with reference to FIG.

The distribution pattern table includes a first distribution pattern table for the first distribution member 300 (FIG. 34(a)) and a second distribution pattern table for the second distribution member 310 (FIG. 34(b)). ) are provided. First, the first distribution pattern table will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the first distribution pattern table stores the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 in association with the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened in each round game. The first distribution pattern table is the same as the opening and closing pattern table (Fig. 32), the first game section in the early stage (1st to 6th opening) and the middle stage (7th to 13th opening). After dividing into three game sections, the second game section of opening) and the third game section of the final stage (opening from the 14th to the 19th time), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 for each game section is stipulated.

In each opening of the first game section (1st to 6th time) and the third game section (14th to 19th time), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern MA. The operation pattern MA is displaced to the distribution state after a period TM1 (0.5 sec) from the opening start of the opening/closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the non-distribution state after a period TM2 (0.1 sec) from that displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

In each opening of the second game section (7th to 13th times), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern MB. The operation pattern MB is displaced to the distributed state after a period TM3 (0.5 sec) from the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the non-distributed state after a period TM4 (0.5 sec) from that displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

That is, in the second game section, the period during which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state is longer than in the first game section and the third game section. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left guide passage 183 is easily distributed to the outlet 182b by the first distribution member 300 in the second game section, and hardly reaches the rotating body 201.例文帳に追加

Next, the second distribution pattern table will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34(b), the second distribution pattern table stores the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 in association with the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 in each round game. In the second distribution pattern table, as in the case of the first distribution pattern table, the round game is the first game section in the beginning (opening from the 1st to the 6th time) and the middle game section (opening from the 7th to the 13th time). ) and the third game section in the final stage (14th to 19th opening), and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is changed for each game section. It is stipulated.

In each opening of the first game section (first to sixth times), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SA. The operation pattern SA is displaced to the distributed state after a period TS1 (0.5 sec) from the opening start of the opening/closing accessory 168, displaced to the non-distributed state after a period TS2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

In each opening of the second game section (7th to 13th times) and the third game section (14th to 19th times), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SB. The operation pattern SB is displaced to the distributed state after a period TS3 (0.5 sec) from the opening start of the opening/closing accessory 168, displaced to the non-distributed state after a period TS4 (0.3 sec) from that displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

That is, in the second game section and the third game section, the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is longer than in the first game section. Therefore, winning balls in the second and third game sections are distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side more than the game balls winning in the accessory device 150 in the first game section. becomes easier.

Here, in the present embodiment, the shutter 221 is operated so that the shutter 221 is in the closed state (the state in which the warp inlet 214 is closed) during the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state. mode is set. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 cannot pass through the warp passage 210 and are stored in the accessory device 150 as they are. Therefore, since the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set as described above, the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 is opened for the 7th to 13th times (second game section) and the 14th to 19th (third game section), it is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150. FIG.

Next, the distribution characteristics of the combination of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the first game section (first to sixth openings), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SA, and the operation pattern SA of the second distribution member 310 is set. The operation mode is set to the operation pattern MA. Therefore, a game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 in the first game section is less likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 and easily reaches the rotating body 201 .

In the second game section (7th to 13th opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SB, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern MB. . Therefore, a game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 in the second game section is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 and difficult to reach the rotating body 201 .

In the third game section (14th to 19th opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SA, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern MA. . Therefore, a game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 in the third game section is easily stored in the accessory device 150, and easily reaches the rotating body 201 if it is not stored.

The operation modes of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are common in all rounds (2nd round to 16th round), unlike the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168. there is That is, the operation mode of each distribution member 300, 310 is uniquely determined in each round.

Returning to the description of the setting processing for each opening (FIG. 33), after referring to the distribution pattern table in step S1905, in step S1906, the operation pattern corresponding to the opening number grasped in step S1902 is applied to each distribution. The division members 300 and 310 are set. Specifically, for the first distribution member 300, the first distribution counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to a value corresponding to the period TM1 (0.5 sec). As for the second distribution member 310, a value corresponding to the period TS1 (0.5 sec) is set in the second distribution counter provided in the same area 114d. Since the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter are updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, each of these counters has a predetermined value (for example, "0"). ), it becomes possible to grasp the displacement timing of each distribution member 300 , 310 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the continuation flag is stored, the process advances to step S1907 to set the open/close pattern of the current round to P1. That is, in the case of the 16R continuation mode, in all rounds (RC1), in all opening times (RC2), the opening/closing pattern of the pattern with the longest opening time is set. Therefore, in the 16R continuation mode, the maximum winning number is likely to occur in each round. In this embodiment, in the open/close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the game continues to the next round even if the V prize is not won (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

In subsequent step S1908, the operation mode (distribution pattern) of each distribution member 300, 310 is set. The distribution pattern in the case of the 16R continuation mode is the same as in the case of the first opening/closing execution mode. The mode of operation of the dividing members 300 and 310 is set so that the dividing members 300 and 310 are maintained in the non-dividing state.

After executing the process of step S1906 or after executing the process of step S1908, this setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the opening/closing process (FIG. 29), after executing each opening setting process in step S1705, the opening process is executed in step S1706. Specifically, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is started to open the opening/closing accessory 168 . Then, in step S1707, an opening command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). In addition to information on whether or not the 16R continuation mode is set, this release command includes information about what round the release is (first round counter RC1 information) and what number of times the release is in one round (second round counter RC1 information). information of the round counter RC2) and information of the opening/closing patterns AD. Based on the received opening command, the effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect for notifying the opening/closing pattern, the winning rate of the accessory device 150, etc., and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. to control.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the round flag is stored and the round game is being played, the process proceeds to step S1708, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 . If the opening/closing accessory 168 is being opened/closed, a process for opening is executed in step S1709, and then the opening/closing process is terminated.

Here, the open-during processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35 .

In the open processing, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". In the processing of this step, the opening time per opening and closing role 168, that is, the elapsed time from the start of opening the opening and closing role 168 is the opening time set with reference to the opening and closing pattern table (Fig. 32). This is the process of determining whether or not the (upper limit opening time) has been reached.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0" and the opening time of the open/close accessory 168 has not reached the upper limit open time, the process proceeds to step S2102, and whether or not the game ball has won the accessory device 150 is checked. It is determined by the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 . If no prize has been won, the main opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by "1" in step S2103, and then the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 in step S2104. After step S2104 is executed, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". If the number is not "0" and the maximum winning number (maximum winning number) of one round is not reached, the opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the winning counter PC is "0" and the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 has reached the maximum winning number in one round, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to "0" is executed in order to end the current round game.

Further, if the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S2101, that is, if the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168 has reached the upper limit opening time, the process proceeds to step S2107, and the second round counter RC2 is Execute the process of subtracting "1".

After execution of step S2106 or step S2107, closing processing is executed in step S2108. In this process, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is ended, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed. In the subsequent step S2109, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is "0". If the second round counter RC2 is not "0", it means that there are remaining openings in the current round game. setting process. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the opening/closing pattern table (FIG. 32), the current closing time (closing period, waiting period) is grasped, and corresponding to that time is determined. Enter the numerical value into the timer counter T.

On the other hand, if the second round counter RC2 is "0" in step S2109 and there is no remaining open, the flow advances to step S2111 to execute the setting process of the waiting time at the end. The waiting time at the end is for waiting for the end of the round game after the final opening and closing in the round game is finished. That is, in the present embodiment, the end of the round game is the end of the waiting time at the end. As with the end waiting time (step S1309 in FIG. 25) related to the first opening/closing execution mode, the end waiting time takes into account the period until the winning game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. is set as That is, a predetermined period (in this embodiment, uniformly 3.5 sec). Therefore, at the end of the round game, all of the game balls winning in the accessory device 150 are discharged from the accessory device 150, except for the game balls stored in the accessory device 150.例文帳に追加

In step S2111, a process of inputting a value corresponding to 3.5 sec to the end waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. Since the termination standby time counter is updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the counter becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that the termination standby time is It is possible to grasp what has passed.

In subsequent step S2112, shutter setting processing for setting the operation mode of the shutter 221 is executed. In this process, the shutter 221 is displaced from the closed state to the open state after the period TT1 (0 sec) has elapsed from the end timing of the round game, and returns to the closed state at the timing when the period TT2 (0.3 sec) has elapsed from the displacement. The operation mode of the shutter 221 is set as follows. In this embodiment, since the period TT1 is set to 0 sec, the shutter 221 is displaced to the open state at the end timing of the round game. Further, the shutter 221 is set to maintain the closed state during the execution of the second opening/closing execution mode, except for the open state maintenance period (period TT2).

In step S2112, a value corresponding to the period TT1 is set in the shutter counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. Since the shutter counter is updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the shutter 221 displacement timing is determined when the shutter counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"). becomes possible to grasp.

After execution of step S2110 or step S2112, a closing command is set in step S2113, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This closing command includes information as to whether each closing process at this time corresponds to the end of one round or to each opening/closing during one round. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the opening/closing process (FIG. 29), when it is determined that the opening/closing accessory 168 is not open in step S1708, that is, the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed, the process proceeds to step S1710, and the value of the timer counter T is "0". The process of this step is the process of determining whether or not the closing time between openings set in step S2110 (FIG. 35) or the standby time at the end set in step S2111 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main opening/closing process is terminated. If the second round counter RC2 is not "0", it means that the closing time between each opening has elapsed. Execute. On the other hand, if the second round counter RC2 is "0", it means that the waiting time at the end has passed, in other words, it means that the round game is finished, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S1712. Execute the round update process with . After that, the main opening/closing process is terminated.

Here, the round update processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the round update process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "1". Since the round update process is executed at the round end timing, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the current round end timing is for the final round in the second opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "1" and it corresponds to the end timing of the round game other than the final round, the process proceeds to step S2202, and whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. determine whether This process is the same as the process of step S1801. If the continuation flag is not stored, that is, if the execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is the continuous variation mode, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. determine whether That is, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the continuation condition to the next round game is satisfied. If the V winning flag is stored and the continuation condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S2204 to execute processing for clearing the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202 (if the execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode) or after the processing of step S2204 is executed, the first round counter RC1 is set to "1" in step S2205. Subtract to update the round number. In the subsequent step S2206, processing for setting the closing time between rounds (period of round interval) is executed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 sec) is input to the timer counter T. As for the closing time between rounds set here, the elapsed timing can be grasped by executing the determination process of step S1703 (FIG. 29) in the normal process (opening/closing process) after the next time.

After execution of step S2206, a round update command is set in step S2207. This set round update command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This round update command includes information such as the closing time between rounds set in step S2206 and the number of rounds of the next round game (which round game it is). Based on the received round update command, the effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the round game or the start of the next round, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is "1" in step S2201 (when the end timing of the final round is reached), or if the V winning flag is not stored in step S2203 (the continuation condition is not established), the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, a process of clearing the value of the first round counter RC1 to "0" is executed to end the second opening/closing execution mode. In the subsequent step S2209, ending start processing is executed. In the start process, a standby time for ending the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

After that, in step S2210, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This ending command includes information such as the waiting time for the ending set in step S2209, the type of the second opening/closing execution mode, and the number of continuations of the round game. A performance control device 82 determines the content of performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined performance is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the pattern display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 100 controls the display of the pattern display device 51 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed.

After executing step S2207 or after executing step S2210, the process advances to step S2211 to execute a process of clearing the round flags stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and then ends the round update process.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the opening/closing process in step S1613, the process for the action part inside the accessory is executed in step S1614. Since the process of this step is the same as the process for the internal role product action unit in FIG. 26, the same figure will be used for description.

In step S1614 for the action part for role object, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the first distribution member 300 . This determination can be made by referring to the value of the first distribution counter set in step S1906 (FIG. 33). Then, when the first distribution counter is at a predetermined value (for example, "0"), that is, when it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1402.

In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the distribution state maintenance period TM2 (0.5 sec or 0.1 sec) is input to the first distribution counter.

If it is not the time to displace the first distribution member 300 in step S1401, or if the process of step S1402 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S<b>1403 , it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the second distribution member 310 . This determination can be made by referring to the value of the second distribution counter set in step S1906. Then, if it is the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive section 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the distribution state maintenance period TS2 (0.3 sec or 0.1 sec) is input to the second distribution counter.

If it is not the time to displace the second distribution member 310 in step S1403, or if the process of step S1404 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the shutter 221 . This determination can be made by referring to the value of the shutter counter set in step S2112 (FIG. 35). If it is the displacement timing, shutter control processing is executed in step S1406. In this process, the process of changing the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Further, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. When the open state is set, a value corresponding to the open state maintenance period TT2 (0.3 sec) is input to the shutter counter.

If it is not the time to displace the shutter 221 in step S1405, or if the process of step S1406 has been executed, the rotating body control process is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the drive state of the rotor driving section 194 is controlled in order to drive and control the rotor 201 in accordance with the settings set in the rotor setting process (FIG. 28) of step S1609. After execution of step S1407, the processing for the internal role product action unit ends.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 28), after executing the process for the internal role product operation unit in step S1614, in step S1615, the presence or absence of the V winning and the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 are checked. Execute processing for passing inside the accessory for grasping.

Here, the processing for passage within the accessory will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37 .

In the intra-accessory passing process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the V winning sensor 192 detects the passage of the game ball (occurrence of V winning). When the occurrence of the V prize is detected, the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2302. In the subsequent step S2303, a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 by one is executed. That is, when the occurrence of V winning is detected in step S2303, it means that the game ball has been discharged from the accessory device 150 in addition to the occurrence of the V winning. The number of game balls in the object device 150 is updated. After step S2303 is executed, the processing for passage within the main role product ends.

On the other hand, if the occurrence of V winning is not detected in step S2301, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the passing (missing) of the game ball is detected by the sensor 193 for loss. If it is detected that the ball has come off, the process advances to step S2303 to execute a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC by one. In other words, even if the game ball is detected to be out, it means that the game ball has been ejected from the accessory device 150. The number of game balls in 150 is updated. On the other hand, if no loss is detected in step S2304, i.e., if neither the V winning nor the loss can be specified, the process for passing through the main accessory is terminated without updating the remaining ball counter RPC. .

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the process of step S1615, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" at step S1616, and at step S1617. It is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has passed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, in step S1618, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In this process, a process for returning the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal game state (normal game state) is performed. For example, the distribution members 300 and 310, the shutter 221, and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at initial positions.

In addition, as a normal game state, the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operation opening 39 changes (for example, the opening/closing mode becomes an opening/closing mode in which the second operation opening 39 is easier to win than in other states). , and a game state in which the type or probability of the game result changes when winning the operation ports 38 and 39 (for example, the probability of a direct hit results changes). It is preferable to set to those game states in the transition process.

After the transition processing at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode in step S1618 is completed, in step S1619, after execution of the opening/closing execution mode end processing, the game state transition processing is terminated. In the closing process of the opening/closing execution mode, the continuation flag and the like used during the opening/closing execution mode are erased. Further, in step S1619, information indicating that one opening/closing execution mode has ended is output to the outside by, for example, stopping the jackpot signal output in step S1611. As a result, the start and end of one opening/closing execution mode can be grasped by the hall computer (management control device) of the game arcade.

Next, the remaining ball determination processing of step S607 in the normal processing (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the remaining ball determination process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 .

If the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored and the first opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the end waiting time set in step S1309 (FIG. 25) has elapsed. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the end waiting time counter has reached a predetermined value (for example, "0").

If the standby time at the end has not elapsed, this remaining ball determination processing is terminated. Determine whether or not If the value of the remaining balls counter RPC is not "0" and the number of winning prizes to the role-thing device 150 and the number of ejections from the role-thing device 150 do not match, the process proceeds to step S2404, and various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are stored. Stores the remaining sphere flag. The remaining ball flag is a flag indicating that game balls remain in the accessory device 150 . When the remaining ball flag is stored in this way, it is determined that game balls remain in the abnormality monitoring process (Fig. 17) of step S107 in the timer interrupt process, and the game stop determination process (Fig. 17) of step S601 in the normal process 20) to transition to a game stop state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2403 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", it is assumed that there are no game balls remaining in the accessory device 150, and this remaining ball determination processing is terminated. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the first opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the flow advances to step S2405 to determine whether or not the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second open/close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 .

If the second opening/closing execution mode flag is stored and the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the process advances to step S2407 to determine whether or not the ending has ended (whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed). If the ending has ended, that is, if it is time to end the second opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S2403 to determine whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0". carry out the judgment. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2405 to S2407, this remaining ball determination processing is terminated.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in the second opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference mainly to the timing chart of FIG. Here, the description will proceed assuming that the execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is the continuous variation mode. In FIG. 39, numbers in square brackets indicate the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 in one round game. For example, [1] in the second round game means the first release in the round game.

When the second round game (round game of the first round in the second opening/closing execution mode) is started at timing t1, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened for the first time (FIGS. 39(a) and (b)). )). In the second round of the round game, since the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled by the opening/closing pattern A (see FIG. 31), the open state of the opening/closing accessory 168 is 1.5 seconds from the timing t1 (see FIG. 32 ( a) is maintained until the timing t3 when the reference) has passed. At timing t3, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, and this state is maintained until timing t4 after 0.5 sec.

Further, when the first opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is controlled based on the start timing (timing t1) (FIG. 39(d)). Since the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SA (see FIG. 34(b)) in the 1st to 6th openings (first game section), 0.5 sec from the timing t1 At the elapsed timing t2, the second distribution member 310 switches from a non-distribution state (a state in which game balls are distributed to the ball distribution section 185 side) to a distribution state (a state in which game balls are distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side). be done. When the motion pattern of the second distribution member 310 is the motion pattern SA, the distribution state is maintained for 0.3 seconds. The operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is also controlled based on the opening start timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, but this is omitted from the drawing for the sake of convenience.

After that, for example, at the timing t5, which is the timing in the middle of the second opening, the game ball wins the prize in the accessory device 150 under the condition that the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state (strictly speaking, When the winning game ball reaches the second distribution member 310), the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 (FIGS. 39(c) and (d)). At this time, the shutter 221 arranged in front of the warp inlet 214 is in a closed state to close the warp inlet 214 (FIG. 39(e)). Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 are stored in the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp entrance section 214 .

After that, another winning ball distributed to the ball distribution section 185 side by the second distribution member 310 and headed toward the rotating body 201 through the left guide passage 183, for example, at timing t6, which is the timing in the middle of the fifth opening, When the rotating body 201 distributes it to the V winning opening guide section 204 and passes through the V winning opening 182a, it is detected by the V winning opening sensor 192, and the V winning flag is turned on (stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114). state) (FIG. 39(g)). As a result, the round continuation condition is satisfied, and the execution of the third round game (next round game) is confirmed.

At timing t7, which is the timing in the middle of the 14th opening, when a game ball wins in the accessory device 150 while the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state, the game ball enters the second distribution member. 310 distributes to the entrance guide portion 215 side. However, since the game balls are already reserved, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side are bounced back by the game balls that are reserved and distributed to the guide passage 183 side. In this way, even if a plurality of game balls are distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side with good timing, the number of game balls to be stored is limited to one.

At subsequent timing t8, when the number of winning game balls into the accessory device 150 reaches 9, which is the upper limit of the winning number per round, the opening and closing accessory 168 in the second round game ends, The opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state. After that, the end of the round game is awaited while the opening/closing accessory 168 is kept in the closed state, and the state is kept from the closing timing (timing t7) of the opening/closing accessory 168 to the timing t9 when the end waiting time (3.5 sec) elapses. maintained.

As already explained, the standby time at the end is set in consideration of the period until the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 is discharged from the accessory device 150 . Therefore, the second round game ends in a state in which all the winning game balls of the accessory device 150 are discharged except for the game balls stored in front of the warp inlet 214.例文帳に追加Therefore, the end of the round game is avoided before the last winning ball in the round game passes through either the V winning hole 182a or the exit hole 182b (before the result of the last winning ball is determined). Therefore, when the winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number per round, the V winning has not occurred and the continuation condition (the condition for executing the third round game) is established. Even if it is not in the state, the continuation condition can be established by passing the last winning ball through the V winning ball. Therefore, it is possible to expect the continuation condition to be satisfied until the last winning ball is discharged.

If the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 after the waiting time at the end has passed, it is not treated as a V winning and the continuation condition is not satisfied. That is, V winning occurs only when the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 before the waiting time at the end elapses. In this sense, the waiting time at the end can also be called the effective period of the V prize.

When the round game of the second round ends at timing t9, the start of the round game of the third round is awaited with the opening/closing accessory 168 closed. This state is maintained from timing t9 until the waiting time (1.5 sec) between rounds elapses.

Also, at timing t9, the shutter 221 placed in front of the warp inlet 214 is switched from the closed state of closing the warp inlet 214 to the open state of opening the warp inlet 214 (see FIG. 39 ( e)). As a result, the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 at the entrance guide portion 215 advance to the warp entrance portion 214 and enter the warp passage 210 . After entering the warp path 210, the game ball goes down the spiral path 213, is guided to the V guide path 260 through the warp exit part 216 and the exit guide part 217, and is guided to the V winning path 191a (V winning sensor 192). be killed.

As already explained, the period until the game ball stored in front of the warp inlet 214 passes through the warp path 210 and reaches the V winning sensor 192 is about 2 seconds. Therefore, the game ball whose storage is released at timing t9 reaches the V winning sensor 192 after the waiting period (1.5 sec) provided between the second and third rounds has passed.

At the timing t10 after the waiting period has elapsed, the third round game is started, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened for the first time (FIGS. 39(a) and (b)). In the third round of the round game, since the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled by the opening/closing pattern B (see FIG. 31), the open state of the opening/closing accessory 168 is 1.5 seconds from the timing t3 (see FIG. 32 ( b) continues until cf.) has passed.

At timing t11 delayed by about 0.5 sec from timing t10, the game ball flowing down the warp passage 210 reaches the V prize sensor 192. FIG. As described above, this game ball is a game ball that is stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round of the round game and released from the storage at the end of the round game. That is, the game balls stored in the second round game pass the V winning sensor 192 at the timing after the start of the third round game and before the end of the third round game. As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the third round of the round game, and the implementation of the fourth round of the round game is confirmed (FIG. 39(g)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round of the round game straddle the round game without being ejected from the accessory device 150, and In the game, it passes through the V winning sensor 192 (V winning). In other words, the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 in the round game of the second round is used not only in the round game of the third round, which is the next round game, but also in the round game of the fourth round, which is the next round game. It also affects the implementation of Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of executing the fourth round of the round game while playing the second round of the round game.

Incidentally, when no pooling occurs in the second round of the game, even if the pooling is canceled, the above-mentioned V winning with the pooled balls does not occur. In this case, in the round game of the 3rd round, if V winning is made through distribution by the rotating body 201, the round game of the 4th round will be implemented.

Here, focusing on the method for carrying out the 4th round game, the game balls are stored in the 2nd round game, and the V prize is won by the route of the rotating body 201 in the 3rd round game. There are two: generating. In other words, the opportunity to acquire the right to implement the fourth round can be given not only to the third round but also to the second round. As a result, it is possible to provide a period in which the game can be played aiming at the execution of the fourth round over a plurality of rounds such as the second round and the third round, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the continuation of the round for a long time.

Also, even if the winning ball cannot be stored in the second round game, if the game ball that won in the third round passes V in the round, the fourth round can be implemented. A second round can be positioned as a re-challenge round. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the fourth round is likely to be carried out, and it is possible to arouse the willingness to play the game.

At that time, in the present embodiment, since the stored game ball passes through the warp passage 210 and always reaches the V winning sensor 192, if the storage can be achieved, the V Your chances of winning a prize will be greatly increased. Therefore, it is possible to strongly arouse a sense of anticipation for the accumulation of game balls, and to enable the player to proceed with the game with peace of mind when the game balls are accumulated. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of required game balls to be stored. Inside the accessory device 150, a large number of game parts such as a guide passage 183 that serves as a flow path for game balls and a rotating body 201 for allocating game balls are mounted, and in securing the storage area, compatibility with these is required. Be strong. Therefore, by reducing the size of the storage area, it is possible to facilitate the design of the character.

On the other hand, the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is shorter than the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state. The probability of being sorted to the guide portion 215 side is lower than the probability of being sorted to the ball sorting portion 185 side. This prevents the player from being overly advantageous.

In this embodiment, even if V winning occurs, the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit number of times of opening, or the total number of winning balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit. The game continues. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game aiming at winning up to the upper limit number even though the game balls released from the storage are configured to win a prize at an early stage of the round game. Not only that, it is also possible to properly secure a playing period aiming at new accumulation.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the storage is canceled before the start of the third round game, and at the start of the round game, the game ball storage area (entrance guide part 215) in the accessory device 150 is It is vacant. Therefore, it is possible to anticipate the occurrence of new accumulation from the beginning of the round game. For example, in a configuration in which the reserve is canceled in the middle of the round game, the aim is to generate the reserve in the remaining time. generation can be targeted.

In addition, it is conceivable to set the separation distance between the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 to twice or more the diameter of the game ball so that a plurality of game balls can be stored. In this case, if the number of reserves is less than the upper limit, it is possible to reserve new game balls without canceling the reserve, so even if it is configured to cancel the reserve in the middle of the round game, new reserves can be created from the beginning of the round game. occurrence can be expected. However, in addition to the difficulty in designing the accessory due to the expansion of the storage area, it is necessary to devise a way to prevent the new stored ball from being released together when the storage is released. Based on these, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the present embodiment.

In addition, the release of the game balls stored in the second round is executed before the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state for the first time in the third round. In this case, the game balls can be distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side after securing the space in the storage area. As a result, even though the winning game balls of the accessory device 150 can be directed toward the entrance guide part 215, the problem that the game balls that have already been stored hinder the storage is suppressed. becomes possible.

Further, the release of the stored game balls is not performed when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state, but is performed in the closed state. In the open state where the accessory device 150 is likely to win a game ball, the player tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball wins a prize. Therefore, if the reserve is released in the open state, the player may miss the release of the reserve. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the accumulation is canceled under the closed state in which it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the prize.

After the above, for example, at timing t12, which is the timing in the middle of the third opening, under the condition that the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state, if the game ball wins the accessory device 150, the game ball The balls are distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 (FIGS. 39(c) and (d)). At this time, the shutter 221 arranged in front of the warp inlet 214 is in a closed state to close the warp inlet 214 (FIG. 39(e)). Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 are stored in the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp entrance portion 214 .

Then, when the third round game ends at timing t13, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state (FIG. 39(e)), and the storage is released. The game balls released from the storage reach the V winning sensor 192 at timing t15 slightly delayed from the start timing (timing t14) of the fourth round round game. As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the 4th round game, and the execution of the 5th round game is confirmed (FIG. 39(g)).

<Regarding the playability of each round game>
Next, the playability of each round game in the second opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the playability of each round game.

The prize-winning property for the accessory device 150 in the second round game is the prize-winning property A (see FIG. 32(e)) in which the game ball is likely to enter the accessory device 150 in each opening from the 1st to the 13th time. It has become. On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 1st to the 13th time are such that the winning ball reaches the rotating body 201 from the 1st to 6th times in the first half. The distribution characteristic A (see FIG. 34(c)) is easy, and the distribution characteristic B is such that winning balls are easily stored in the accessory device 150 from the 7th to 13th times in the latter half. Therefore, in the round game of the second round, it is easy to expect both the V winning (self-powered continuation) via the rotating body 201 and the accumulation of winning balls.

Since the round game of the second round is the first round game in the second opening/closing execution mode, no winning balls are carried over from the previous round game by the stored balls. Therefore, in order to carry out the third round game, it is necessary to win a V prize via the rotating body 201 in the second round game. Therefore, by providing the game characteristics as described above, the occurrence of the V prize is facilitated, and an excessive increase in the difficulty level of the third round is suppressed.

By the way, the round game is configured to end when the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number (9). Therefore, the round game may end in the middle of the second game section. In this case, if the state in which the winning ball is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 occurs earlier than the state in which the winning ball is likely to reach the rotating body 201, the round may occur before or after switching to the latter state. There is a risk that the game will end and the chance of self-continuation (V winning for executing the third round) will not be satisfactorily provided. As a result, although the game balls are reserved in the second round and the right to execute the fourth round is acquired, the third round is not conducted, and the above-mentioned reservation is likely to be lost. .

In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the second round, the state in which the winning ball is likely to reach the rotating body 201 occurs before the state in which the winning ball is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 . With such a configuration, the opportunity to continue on one's own strength is preferably ensured, and the third round is facilitated. As a result, it becomes easier to provide a game feature in which, after confirming the execution of the third round, the player also aims to acquire the right to execute the fourth round.

The prize-winning property for the accessory device 150 in the third round game is the prize-winning property B (see FIG. 32(e)) in which the game balls are likely to enter the accessory device 150 in each opening from the 7th to the 13th time. It has become. On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 7th to the 13th time are similar to the case of the 2nd round. It has an easy distribution characteristic B. Therefore, in the third round of the game, the playability is such that weight is placed on the game of storing the winning balls in the accessory device 150 .

In this case, if the winning ball can be stored in the second round, the stored ball wins the V prize in the third round, the implementation of the fourth round is confirmed, and the winning ball is stored in the third round. If you can do it, you can get the right to implement the 5th round. On the other hand, if the winning balls are not stored in the 2nd round, even if the winning balls are stored in the 3rd round, the 4th round may not be implemented, so the 5th round will not necessarily be implemented. Not exclusively. In this way, in a round game in which the weight is placed on the game in which winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150, the game result (whether or not the winning balls can be stored) in the previous round has a great influence.

Note that it is not impossible to win a prize for the accessory device 150 in each of the 1st to 6th and 14th to 19th openings in the 3rd round. Therefore, although it is more difficult than the second round, it is also possible to win a V prize via the rotating body 201 in the third round game. The playability of the round game from the 4th round to the 7th round is the same as the playability of the 3rd round.

The winning characteristic of the accessory device 150 in the 8th to 11th rounds of the game is the winning characteristic D (see FIG. 32 ( e) see). That is, in the 8th to 11th rounds of the round game, it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize in each of the 1st to 13th openings. Therefore, in these round games, until the end of the round game, it is difficult for both the storage of game balls and the V winning via the rotating body 201 to occur, and the round game may end without either of them occurring. It becomes a playability that arouses a feeling of impatience.

On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 14th to the 19th time are such that winning balls are easily stored in the accessory device 150 and reach the rotating body 201. It has a distribution characteristic C that makes it easy to In other words, at the end of the round, when the winning of the accessory device 150 is likely to occur, both the storage of game balls and the V winning via the rotating body 201 are likely to occur.

The prize winning characteristic for the accessory device 150 in the round games of the 12th to 16th rounds is the winning characteristic C (see FIG. 32 ( e) see). On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distributing member 300 and the second distributing member 310 in each of the first to sixth openings are the distribution characteristics A that allow winning balls to easily reach the rotor 201 . Therefore, in these round games, the playability is such that weight is placed on the V prize (self-powered continuation) via the rotating body 201 .

In this way, the playability is differentiated depending on the round, such as giving weight to the game of accumulating winning balls in one round, and giving weight to the game of achieving self-continuation in another round. As a result, a plurality of games can be enjoyed in one second opening/closing execution mode, and the monotony of the games can be suppressed.

At that time, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are made common in each round, and the opening/closing pattern of each round provides different game characteristics. In this case, it is not necessary to finely set both the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 and the opening/closing pattern for each round, and it is sufficient to set only the opening/closing pattern. Therefore, the processing load of the main controller 81 and the work load at the time of designing the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Moreover, the following effect is also expected by having the above-mentioned structure. In a configuration in which the winning ball to the accessory device 150 wins a V prize and thus becomes an advantageous state (round continuation), the player's attention is likely to be focused on the destination of the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 . In this case, it is assumed that the player shows a strong interest in the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 that influence the flow of winning balls, and is watching their movements. Under such circumstances, if the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are made different in each round, the player may notice it and lose interest in understanding that the change in characteristics has been planned in advance. be. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the movements of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are common in each round, it is possible to suppress such an awareness. As a result, it is easy to feel that the difference in susceptibility to storage between rounds is due to chance, and it is possible to suitably provide the amusement of enjoying the behavior of the game ball.

<Regarding the flow of remaining ball monitoring>
Next, the flow of remaining ball monitoring will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of remaining ball monitoring.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, winning balls to the accessory device 150 can be stored in the accessory device 150 in each round game, and the stored balls can be stored in the accessory device 150 in subsequent round games. It is discharged from Therefore, in a round game in which accumulation occurs, the number of ejected balls becomes smaller than the number of winning balls at the end of the game. In this case, if the remaining balls are determined for each round, there is a risk that the remaining balls will frequently become abnormal even though the game is played normally, and the progress of the game will be hindered.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball determination process is not performed for each round, but performed only once at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (timing t18). As a result, even though the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 can be discharged in the next round, frequent abnormalities of the remaining balls are suppressed, and the game can be played smoothly.

Here, the flow of remaining ball monitoring using the remaining ball determination process is summarized as follows. Survival ball monitoring in the second opening/closing execution mode is performed based on the surviving ball counter RPC as already described (see step S2411 in FIG. 38). This remaining ball counter RPC is not cleared in the middle of the second opening/closing execution mode, but is updated throughout the mode from start to finish. Then, at the end of the ending, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter RPC is 0, and if it is not 0 (when the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls do not match), it is determined that the remaining balls are abnormal.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining balls are monitored from the start timing to the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode, specifically, from the timing when the accessory device 150 first wins in the second round to the final timing. The period up to the timing when the final winning ball is ejected from the accessory device 150 in the 16th round, which is a round, is to be monitored.

However, even if the number of discharged balls from the accessory device 150 is counted, it is not possible to specify which ball is the final ball. At the end of the expected ending, the judgment processing of the remaining balls is performed. If the second opening/closing execution mode does not last for 16 rounds and ends in the middle of the round, that round will be the final round, and the remaining balls will be determined at the end of the ending after the end of the round. .

Here, as an event that causes a remaining ball abnormality, for example, an act of illegally trying to win a V prize by making an illegal ball with a string attached enter the accessory device 150 and manipulating the illegal ball through the string. It is conceivable that the In this case, if the string is pulled and loosened repeatedly to manipulate the illegal balls so that they repeatedly pass through the V winning sensor 192, the number of winning balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is larger than the number of winning balls entering the accessory device 150. As the number increases, the two become inconsistent.

If it is determined that there is an abnormality in the remaining balls due to such an event, the state is shifted to a game stop state, and the progress of the game is stopped. Further, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the remaining balls, an external signal indicating the occurrence of the abnormality in the remaining balls is output to the management control device on the game arcade side. By these processes, the fraudulent act is suppressed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The winning game balls in the accessory device 150 can be stored in the accessory device 150, and the stored balls can pass through the V winning sensor 192 (V winning opening 182a) in the next round game. Normally, the round game that can acquire the execution right with the winning ball in one round game is the next round from the round game in which the winning occurred, but in the present embodiment, the winning ball is used for the next round. It is possible to acquire the execution right, and it is possible to realize novel gameplay.

At that time, when the winning game ball is not stored in the accessory device 150, the winning ball can pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which the winning occurs. In this case, for example, focusing on the implementation of the 4th round, the opportunity to acquire the right to implement the round is given over a plurality of rounds of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. As a result, the expectation for continuing the round can be maintained for a long time, and the interest can be improved.

<Second Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a timing chart for explaining the game flow in the second opening/closing execution mode.

The distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 in the second to fourth rounds is the same as in the first embodiment. That is, after 0.5 sec has passed from the start timing of each release in each round game, the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 is switched to the distribution state in which it is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side, and then 0.3 sec. This state is maintained for a long time (see FIG. 34(b)).

On the other hand, in the fifth round of the round game, as shown in FIG. 42, the second distribution member 310 distributes the winning game ball to the accessory device 150 throughout the round game from the start to the end. It is maintained in a non-distribution state in which it is distributed to the guide passage 183 side. That is, in the fifth round of the round game, the second distribution member 310 is not switched to the distribution state (see FIG. 42(b)).

Therefore, in the fifth round of the round game, the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 cannot move to the entrance guide portion 215, and the storage of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is restricted. Although not shown in FIG. 42, the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168, the distribution mode of the first distribution member 300, and the operation mode of the rotating body 201 are the same as those in the first embodiment. is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the determination of remaining balls is performed at the end of the fifth round of the round game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter RPC is 0 at the timing when the waiting time at the end has elapsed after the final opening and closing in the 5th round. If the remaining ball counter RPC is not 0, the remaining ball flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 114, assuming that the remaining ball is abnormal. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed in the middle of the second opening/closing execution mode.

Here, an example of the flow of the round game from the 2nd round to the 5th round will be described. Here, it is assumed that the same number of game balls as the upper limit (9) are awarded to the accessory device 150 in each of the second to fifth rounds. In addition, in each of the second to fourth rounds, the timing at which the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state matches the winning timing of the game ball to the accessory device 150. It is assumed that game balls are stored in the device 150 .

When the game balls are stored in the round game of the second round (timing t21), the game balls are maintained in the stored state until the end of the round. Then, at the timing t22 when the round game of the second round ends, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state, thereby canceling the storage. Since it takes a predetermined movement period (approximately 2 sec) for the game ball that has been released from storage to reach the V winning sensor 192, the game ball will not reach the V winning sensor 192 after the third round game is started. (timing t23).

That is, the stored game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 after the third round of the game is started. Therefore, at timing t22, which is the end of the second round of the round game, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is less than the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 by one. Become.

In the third round game, since the game balls released from the storage in the second round game reach the V winning sensor 192, 1 is added to the number of discharged balls. However, the game balls are stored at timing t24, and the game balls that have won the accessory device 150 during the third round are carried over to the fourth round. Since the added amount is offset by the carried-over amount, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is still one less than at the timing t25 at the end of the third round game.

Similarly, at timing t27, which is the end of the fourth round game, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is one because the winning balls are accumulated in the middle of the four rounds (timing t26). It will be in a state of few. In other words, at the end of each of the 2nd to 4th rounds, even if the game is played normally, the number of winning prizes and the number of discharged balls cannot match.

In the 5th round game, since the game balls released from storage in the 4th round game reach the V winning sensor 192, the number of discharged balls is incremented by 1 (timing t28). Also, in the fifth round of the round game, since the accumulation of game balls is regulated, all the game balls won during the 5 rounds are discharged during the 5 rounds. Therefore, when the winning number and the discharged number are compared for only 5 rounds, the discharged number is one more than the winning number. This surplus compensates for the shortage in the number of discharged coins that occurred at the end of the fourth round, and the total number of winning prizes and the number of discharged coins match.

From the player's point of view, the second distribution member 310 suddenly cannot be switched to the distribution state in the fifth round, even though it was possible to store the game balls up to the fourth round. Storage becomes impossible. For this reason, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will misunderstand that a failure has occurred. Therefore, it is preferable to notify the player that the reserve is possible in the 2nd to 4th rounds, but that it is impossible in the 5th round. As such a configuration, in the second round to the fourth round of the game, on the display screen G of the accessory device 150, a character display, a character display, a background display, or the like suggesting that the storage is possible. On the other hand, it can be configured not to perform it in the 5th round game, or to perform different notification in each round game of the 2nd to 4th rounds and the 5th round.

At timing t29, which is the end of the fifth round of the round game, determination of remaining balls is performed. In other words, the remaining balls are determined during the monitoring target period from the second round to the fifth round. As described above, when the game is played normally, the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls are the same, and the remaining ball counter RPC becomes zero. In this case, the residual ball abnormality is not recognized, and the game is continued from the sixth round onwards. On the other hand, for example, if an illegal ball attached with a thread repeatedly passes through the V winning sensor 192, the number of discharged balls becomes larger than the number of winning balls, resulting in an abnormal remaining ball.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, a round game is provided in which the accumulation is regulated, and the remaining balls are determined at the end of the round game. , the remaining balls can be determined in the middle of the second opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to quickly grasp the abnormality of the remaining balls, and it is possible to suppress the damage to the game hall from increasing when the fraudulent act is performed.

As in the case of the 2nd to 4th rounds, in the 6th to 9th rounds of the round game, the accumulation of game balls in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and in the 10th round of the round game, the accumulation is restricted. be done. In the 11th to 15th rounds of the round game, the accumulation of game balls in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and in the 16th round of the round game, the accumulation is restricted. At the end of the 10th and 16th round games (timings t30 and t31), determination of remaining balls is made. That is, in one of the second opening/closing execution modes, the determination of remaining balls is performed every predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, it is arbitrary to set the round in which the remaining balls are determined by regulating the storage, and is not limited to the 5th round, the 10th round and the 16th round. Further, the number of rounds for which the retention is restricted is also arbitrary, and for example, it may be configured such that the retention is restricted only once in the eighth round and the determination of remaining balls is performed.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the remaining balls, the game is stopped as in the first embodiment. By the way, the residual ball abnormality is not limited to fraud, and can also occur when the retention is not properly released due to malfunction of the shutter 221 . For example, if for some reason the shutter 221 is not switched to the open state at the end of the fourth round, game balls remain in the accessory device 150, and at the end of the fifth round, the number of discharged balls is one less than the winning number.

As described above, since the remaining ball abnormality is not always caused by fraudulence, it is desirable to be able to change the response when the remaining ball abnormality occurs depending on whether or not it is based on fraudulent activity. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following configuration.

After the transition to the game stop state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on by operating the power switch 92b by an attendant of the game hall or the like in order to cancel it. If the power is turned on while the power is on, the RAM 114 initialization process (step S509) is executed in the main process (FIG. 18). As a result, the V winning in the 5th round game (timing t28 in FIG. 42) is invalidated, and the continuation of the second opening/closing execution mode (6th round round game) cannot be played.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a, the initialization process of the RAM 114 (step S509) is not executed. Further, by the processing of steps S512 and S513 in the main processing, the abnormal state of remaining balls is canceled, and the game state before shifting to the game stop state is restored. As a result, the V winning in the fifth round becomes effective, and the continuation of the game can be played.

With such a configuration, when a game hall attendant or the like rushes under the pachinko machine 10 and confirms fraudulent activity, by turning on the power while operating the RAM erase switch 98a, After that, the fraudulent person is restrained from continuing to unfairly profit. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is no fraudulent activity, or when no fraudulent activity is confirmed, by turning on the power supply without operating the RAM erasing switch 98a, the continuation of the game can be played, and the player can benefit. can be suppressed from being damaged.

Further, in the case where a distinction is made between legitimate players and cheaters, the following configuration may be used.

First, the shutter 221 is closed when shifting to the game stop state. That is, if the shutter 221 is in the closed state at the time of transition to the game stop state, the operation of the shutter 221 is controlled so that the closed state is maintained even after the transition to the game stop state. As a result, when game balls are stored in the accessory device 150, the stored state is not released and the game is stopped.

After that, the power switch 92b is operated by a staff member of the game arcade to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 in order to cancel the game stop state. That is, the stored state is maintained even after the power is turned off. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the shutter 221 is closed when the shutter driving section 221a is not driven. Therefore, it is not necessary to supply backup power to the shutter drive unit 221a when power is cut off. In a configuration in which the shutter drive section 221a is driven so that the shutter 221 is closed, backup power may be supplied to the shutter drive section 221a to bring it into an excited state.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up without switching the shutter 221 to the open state. In this case, by the processing of steps S512 and S513 in the main processing (FIG. 18), the abnormal state of remaining balls is released, and the game state before shifting to the game stop state is restored. In this case also, the storage state is maintained without switching the shutter 221 to the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the remaining ball abnormality and the game stop state while leaving the stored balls. As a result, the game interrupted by the game stop processing can be continued by using the remaining stored balls as service balls. In other words, the sixth round of the game should normally be a round with no balls carried over from the previous round, but if the game is stopped due to a malfunction of the shutter 221 or the like, there will be balls carried over. It becomes possible to play the sixth round.

On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 98a is being pressed, the game cannot be continued because the RAM is initialized, so the service ball cannot be provided as described above. When the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 98a is being pressed, the shutter driving section 221a is driven to switch the shutter 221 to the open state. Specifically, after an affirmative determination is made in step S503 of the main processing (FIG. 18), processing for switching the shutter 221 to the open state is executed before setting interrupt permission in step S516. As a result, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the accessory device 150 to operate the second distribution member 310 and the game balls are illegally stored, the stored balls are used to prevent another fraudulent act. can be suppressed.

At this time, after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed, an interrupt permission setting process (step S516) is executed. That is, when the shutter 221 is switched to the open state with the start-up of the pachinko machine 10, the V prize is validated after the predetermined waiting time has passed since the RAM erasing switch 98a was operated. In this case, the predetermined standby time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball released from storage to reach the V winning sensor 192 . With such a configuration, when the game ball that has been released from storage at the time of startup passes through the V winning sensor 192, V winning or V winning error (which occurs when V winning occurs at the timing when V winning should not occur) error) can be suppressed.

Instead of the standby process, a configuration may be adopted in which the discharge confirmation process is performed and then the interrupt permission setting process is performed. That is, based on the detection of the passage of the V winning sensor 192, it is possible to grasp that the game ball that has been released from the storage is discharged from the accessory device 150, and then set the interruption permission.

Further, by adopting a configuration in which the shutter 221 is switched to the open state when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 98a is being pressed, it is possible for a staff member or the like to check the operation of the shutter 221. FIG. In other words, if it is necessary to check whether the shutter 221 operates properly, even though the fraudulent act has not been discovered, this can be done by operating the RAM erase switch 98a.

In the above embodiment, the remaining balls are determined at the end of the fifth round. It is good also as composition which judges. In short, it is sufficient if the determination of the remaining balls is performed at the end of the 5th round, and the execution timing of the determination of the remaining balls is after the end of the 5th round and before the start of the 6th round. is optional. This also applies to the determination of remaining balls performed at the end of the 10th and 16th rounds.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above embodiments in the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168, the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310, and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination in the second opening/closing execution mode. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing pattern table of the opening/closing accessory 168 according to the present embodiment. In the figure, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, opening/closing patterns B' to D' shown in FIGS. 43(a) to (c) are set instead of the opening/closing patterns B to D shown in FIGS. 32(b) to (d). These opening/closing patterns B' to D' are defined in an opening/closing pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c), each opening/closing pattern table divides the round game into the first game section corresponding to the opening from the first to the second time and the opening from the third to the eighth time. After dividing into the corresponding second game section, the third game section from the 9th to the 13th time, and the fourth game section from the 14th to the 19th time, the opening and closing mode of the opening and closing accessory 168 is divided for each game section. is stipulated.

In the opening and closing patterns B' to D', during the opening of 19 times in one round game, the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec) in the first to second times (RC2 = 19 to 18) belonging to the first game section A shorter opening of 0.1 sec followed by a closing of 0.5 sec (also referred to as a short open mode). Then, in the subsequent game section, either the open/close pattern P1 or P2 is set as in the case of FIG. Both of these open/close patterns P1 and P2 have a longer open time than the short open mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in each opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing patterns B' to D', until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the round game, the period in which the open state is relatively short is the opening/closing role in the short open state. The object 168 is controlled, and then the opening/closing role object 168 is controlled with the opening/closing pattern P1 or P2 having a relatively long period of being open.

Here, in the short open mode, the period of the open state is as short as 0.1 sec. In addition, the closed state period in the short open mode is 0.5 sec, which is relatively longer than the open period. In other words, under the condition that the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled in the short-open mode, it is in the closed state in most cases, and is switched to the open state only for a moment. Therefore, in the short open mode, the winning of game balls to the accessory device 150 does not occur. In this sense, the short open mode can also be said to be a winning restriction mode that restricts winning to the accessory device 150 .

Next, the remaining ball determination processing executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing remaining ball determination processing according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the processing of steps S2701 to S2703 shown in FIG. 44 is executed when affirmative determination is made in step S2405 of FIG. 38, and is executed instead of the processing of steps S2406 and S2407 of FIG. .

If it is determined in step S2405 that the second open/close execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not it is time to execute remaining ball determination. In the present embodiment, when the second opening/closing execution mode is executed, the remaining balls are determined for each round. Specifically, the determination of remaining balls is performed at the timing when a predetermined period (1 sec) has passed from the start of each round game.

Grasping of the elapsed time from the start of the round game is carried out by using judgment counters provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. That is, a value corresponding to 1 sec is set in the determination counter, and this value is updated (decremented) by timer interrupt processing, and updated at a predetermined cycle. Then, when the determination counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it can be grasped that the execution timing of the remaining ball determination has come.

If it is determined in step S2701 that it is not time to execute remaining ball determination, this remaining ball determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to execute remaining ball determination, the process advances to step S2702 to determine whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" to perform remaining ball determination. The remaining ball determination in this case is intended for the period from when one remaining ball determination is performed until when the next remaining ball determination is performed. Incidentally, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S2104 in FIG. 35), and is decremented by 1 each time discharge of a game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. It is incremented (step S2303 in FIG. 37).

If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process advances to step S2703 to store the remaining ball flag in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 assuming that the game ball remains in the accessory device 150. do. After that, this remaining ball determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2703 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", it is determined that there are no game balls remaining in the accessory device 150, and this remaining ball determination processing ends.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a timing chart for explaining the game flow in the second opening/closing execution mode. Here, it is assumed that game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 in the middle of the second round.

When the second round game ends at timing t41, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game balls stored in the entrance guide portion 215 move toward the warp passage 210. At the same time, a standby state (round interval) for waiting for the start of the third round game is entered, and the standby state continues for 1.5 seconds. Here, it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball released from storage to reach the V winning sensor 192, and this time is about 0.5 seconds longer than the duration of the round interval. Therefore, the game ball whose storage is released reaches the V winning sensor 192 after about 0.5 sec has passed after the start of the third round game (timing t43).

When the third round game is started at timing t42, the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled to be opened/closed in a short opening mode. In the short open mode, the open state for 0.1 sec and the closed state for 0.5 sec are repeated twice, so the total execution period of the short open mode is 1.2 sec (timing t45).

Also, at timing t44 when 1 sec has passed since the third round game was started, the remaining balls determination corresponding to the second round round game is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the prize in the accessory device 150 in the second round of the round game have been ejected from the accessory device 150 . That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball determination corresponding to the round game of the second round is performed for a predetermined period from the end of the second round (1.5 sec, which is the period of the round interval, and 2.5 sec, which is the sum of the above 1 sec). ) is configured to be executed after the elapse. If the number of winning game balls into the accessory device 150 and the number of discharged game balls from the accessory device 150 do not match in the determination process, it is treated as a residual ball abnormality.

Similarly, at the end of the round game of the 3rd round, the reserve is canceled (timing t46), and the game ball whose reserve is canceled is about 0.5 sec after the start of the round game of the 4th round. , the V winning sensor 192 is reached (timing t48). Also, until 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fourth round, the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled to open and close in a short-open mode (timing t50). Remaining ball judgment is performed. This remaining ball determination corresponds to the third round of the round game. That is, it is a process of confirming whether or not all game balls that have won prizes in the accessory device 150 in the third round of the round game have been discharged from the accessory device 150 .

Here, the relationship between the winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150 and the number of discharged game balls from the accessory device 150 will be described. Here, the above relationship will be described with reference to the period from timing t45 to t50.

When the short open mode ends at timing t45, the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to either the opening/closing pattern P1 or P2. In these opening/closing modes, winning to the accessory device 150 is permitted, so winning occurs between timings t45 and t46. Of the game balls that have won a prize in the accessory device 150, game balls other than the stored game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 by timing t46 when the third round ends. Therefore, at timing t46, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is less than the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 by one.

When the fourth round is started at timing t47, the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled to be opened/closed in a short opening mode from timing t47 to timing t50 after 1.2 seconds have passed. In the short open mode, no game balls can win in the accessory device 150, so no new wins occur between timings t47 and t50.

Here, 1.2 sec, which is the execution period of the short open mode, is longer than the elapsed period (approximately 0.5 sec) from the start of the fourth round until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192. . Therefore, the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 during execution of the short open mode. As described above, no new prizes are awarded during execution of the short open mode. The number of game balls discharged from the device 150 matches.

This state is maintained until timing t50 when the short open mode ends. Therefore, at timing t49, which is the timing after the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 and before the end of the short open mode, the remaining ball determination is performed to properly determine the remaining ball abnormality. can be done.

In this way, during the period in which the opening and closing accessory 168 is controlled to be opened and closed in the short open mode, the game balls stored in the previous round game are passed through the V winning sensor 192, so that the accessory device 150 can be opened and closed. The storage release ball can be passed through V while avoiding the period during which the ball wins. As a result, it is possible to suppress the mixture of the storage release ball and the winning ball in the accessory device 150, and to make it easy to understand which game ball has passed through the V.

On top of that, since the remaining balls are determined during the execution of the short open mode and after the storage release ball has passed through the V, the remaining balls can be determined for each round even while the game balls are carried over. , the pachinko machine 10 that is resistant to the abnormality of remaining balls can be made. Further, since the remaining balls determination is performed while overlapping with the round game, the smooth progress of the game can be promoted as compared with the case where the round game is started after performing the remaining ball determination.

In addition, since the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state even though it is in the short open mode, there is a possibility that a prize may be awarded depending on the flow of the game ball. In this case, if it is immediately determined that there is an abnormality in the remaining balls due to the mismatch between the winning number and the discharged number, the game is likely to be interrupted due to an erroneous determination. Therefore, if the number of winning prizes and the number of discharges do not match once, it may not be considered as an error in remaining balls, but if it occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice) in succession, it may be determined as an error in remaining balls.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the second opening and closing execution mode, the second round game, which is the first round, does not carry over (storage) the game balls from the previous round game, so the rotating body 201 is moved in the second round game. The 3rd and subsequent rounds cannot be carried out unless V prizes (self-sustained continuation) are achieved. For this reason, compared to round games from the third round onwards, in which carryover balls can be expected, the degree of difficulty in acquiring the execution right for the next round becomes higher, and a situation occurs in which the second opening/closing execution mode ends by the second round. easy.

In particular, in the second round, even though the game ball was able to be stored in the accessory device 150, if the continuation of self-reliance could not be achieved, the second opening/closing execution mode would end prematurely, The long-awaited storage ball will be ruined. In this case, the player will be greatly disappointed, and there is a risk that the player's desire to play will diminish. The present embodiment aims to remedy such a case, and the configuration thereof will be described in detail below.

This embodiment differs from each of the above-described embodiments in the manner in which the shutter 221 is switched. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a process during opening executed by MPU 112 of main controller 81 in the present embodiment. Here, the processing of steps S2801 to S2804 shown in FIG. 46 is executed between steps S2104 and S2105 in the processing during opening of FIG. 35 is a process for switching the opening/closing accessory 168 from the open state to the closed state in the second opening/closing execution mode.

After updating the remaining ball counter RPC in step S2104, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15". The first round counter RC1 counts the number of rounds of the round game, and in step S2801, whether or not the round game being executed is the first round (second round) in the second opening/closing execution mode. determine whether

When the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15" and the round game being executed is the second round, the process advances to step S2802 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "1". . The winning counter PC counts the winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150, and its value indicates the remaining winning number up to the upper limit winning number (9). In step S2802, it is determined whether or not the number of prizes to be awarded to the accessory device 150 is one remaining to the maximum number of prizes.

If the value of the winning counter PC is "1" and the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is one remaining to reach the maximum number of winnings, in step S2803, V winning is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. Determine whether a flag is stored. That is, in the round game of the second round, it is determined whether or not the V prize (self-powered continuation) via the rotating body 201 has been achieved.

If the V winning flag is not stored and the self-powered continuation has not been achieved, shutter release processing is executed in step S2804. In step S2804, the shutter drive unit 221a is driven to switch the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the entrance guide portion 215 (see FIG. 8), the storage is released, and the game ball moves toward the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210 .

After executing step S2804, the process advances to step S2105 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". Further, when negative determinations are made in steps S2801 and S2802, and when affirmative determinations are made in step S2803, the process proceeds to step S2105.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a timing chart for explaining the game flow in the second round game. Here, it is assumed that game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at timing t51, which is in the middle of the second round.

At timing t52, when the eighth game ball wins the accessory device 150 (FIG. 47(c)), it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. In the example shown in FIG. 47, since the V winning flag is not stored (FIG. 47(g)), the shutter 221 is also switched from the closed state to the open state at timing t52 (FIG. 47(e)). As a result, the storage of game balls is released (FIG. 47(f)).

While it takes about 2 seconds for the storage release ball to reach the V winning sensor 192, each round game in the second opening/closing execution mode is provided with a waiting time of 3.5 seconds at the end. Therefore, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 at timing t53 before timing t54 when the second round ends (FIG. 47(g)). As a result, a V winning occurs in the round game of the second round, and the execution right of the third round is obtained.

In this way, it is determined whether or not V has passed (whether or not self-continuation has been achieved) at the specific timing of the second round (timing when the number of prizes remaining is 1), and V has passed. If not, the shutter 221 is opened to cancel the storage and V pass in the round game of the second round, thus avoiding the inconvenience that the third round is not carried out even though the game balls are stored. .

In addition, since the opening process of the shutter 221 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of storage, the shutter 221 is opened at timing t52 even when there are no stored balls in the second round game. However, since there are no stored balls, there is no V prize. In other words, the above remedial measures will only work if the reserve is achieved in the second round of play, and there will be a difference in the degree of preferential treatment between the case where the reserve is not achieved. .

Also, although not shown in FIG. 47, when the V winning flag is stored at timing t52, that is, when the self-continuation is achieved, the shutter 221 is not opened at timing t53, and the above-described first As in the first embodiment, the shutter 221 is opened at timing t54 when the second round ends. Therefore, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 in the third round, thereby obtaining the right to play in the fourth round. In other words, compared to the case where self-continuation cannot be achieved in the second round, the configuration is advantageous for the player.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from each of the above-described embodiments in the opening waiting time (opening timing) in the first opening/closing execution mode, the switching mode of the shutter 221, and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination.

Briefly describing the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, after the lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the jackpot), the It is configured to release the storage of game balls. Then, if the timing at which the stored release ball passes the V prize sensor 192 and the execution timing of the first opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the result of normal opening) after the second opening/closing execution mode is completed are well matched. , the second opening/closing execution mode is generated by the storage release ball. In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the upper limit of the number of shared reservations will be one.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the release timing table according to this embodiment. The opening timing table is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c of the ROM 113. FIG.

In the opening timing table, an opening standby time is defined in association with the opening type counter CS. Here, if there is no pending information, the waiting time for opening is the waiting time from winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 to opening the opening/closing accessory 168, and if there is pending information, the time when the pending information is consumed ( This is the standby time from when the validity determination process of step S805 (FIG. 21) is performed for the reserved information to the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the release table according to the present embodiment, two types of release standby time, 0.5 sec and 2.5 sec, are set. "0" to "89" of the release type counter CS correspond to the release waiting time of 0.5 sec, and "90" to "99" of the release type counter CS correspond to the release waiting time of 2.5 sec. there is In other words, the probability of selecting an open waiting time of 0.5 sec is 9/10, and the probability of selecting an open waiting time of 2.5 sec is 1/10, and the latter probability is lower. .

Next, the remaining ball determination process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 49(a). The process of FIG. 49(a) is executed in place of the remaining ball determination process of FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment.

In the remaining ball determination processing according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not a determination standby flag is stored in various flag storage area 114e of RAM 114. FIG. The determination standby flag indicates that the execution of the remaining ball determination process is on standby after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, and is set when the second opening/closing execution mode ends.

If the determination standby flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If the first open/close execution mode is being executed, the process advances to step S3003 to execute the processes of steps S3003 to S3005. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S2402 to S2404 in FIG. 38, so description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, the process advances to step S3006 to determine whether or not the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If the second open/close execution mode is being executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the process advances to step S3008 to determine whether or not the ending has ended, that is, whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed.

If the ending has ended, shutter setting processing is executed in step S3009. In this process, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 switches from the closed state to the open state after a predetermined period (3.5 sec) has elapsed from the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode (ending end timing). . The period for maintaining the open state is arbitrary, but is set to 0.3 sec, for example, as in the first embodiment.

In subsequent step S3010, processing for setting a determination standby time is executed. The determination standby time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination process, and in the present embodiment, it is the standby time from the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode. The judgment waiting time is the time (about 5.5 sec), and is set to 6 sec, for example.

After execution of step S3010, in step S3011, the judgment standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and then this remaining ball judgment processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3001 that the determination standby flag is stored, the process advances to step S3012 to determine whether or not it is time to execute remaining ball determination. This process determines whether or not the determination standby time set in step S3010 has elapsed. If it is not the time to execute the remaining ball determination, this remaining ball determination process is ended. If it is the time to execute the remaining ball determination, the process advances to step S3013 to check whether the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed. judge. By executing such processing, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the remaining ball determination overlaps with the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode.

If the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step S3014 whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" to determine remaining balls. In this case, the remaining ball counter RPC covers the period from the start of the second opening/closing execution mode to the execution timing. Incidentally, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S2104 in FIG. 35 and step S1503 in FIG. 27), and ejection of a game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. It is decremented by 1 each time (step S2303 in FIG. 37 and step S1506 in FIG. 27).

If it is determined in step S3014 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process advances to step S3015 to determine that game balls remain in the accessory device 150, and that remaining balls are stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Store flags. After step S3015 is executed, or if it is determined in step S3014 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", in step S3016, the judgment standby flag stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased. . After that, this remaining ball determination processing is terminated.

If the determination in step S3013 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the first open/close execution mode is in progress, the processing in steps S3014 and S3015 (remaining ball determination) is skipped, and the processing in step S3016 is executed. The determination of the remaining ball in this case is performed in step S3004. That is, when the execution timing of the remaining ball determination and the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode overlap, the remaining ball determination is executed at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode.

Next, normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 49(b). FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart showing normal processing. Note that FIG. 49(b) shows only the part that differs from the normal processing of FIG. 19, and the processing of step S3101 of FIG. 49(b) is executed by step S606 of FIG. 19 (game state transition processing). It is done after

In step S3101, shutter processing is executed. This processing is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 under the condition that neither the first opening/closing execution mode nor the second opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, if the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed when the timing for driving the shutter 221 set in step S3009 has arrived, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process. If the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the drive timing of the shutter 221 arrives, the shutter 221 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the processing for the internal action unit in step S809 of FIG. switch.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 and 51 are timing charts for explaining the flow of the game after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. It shows the case where 0.5 sec is selected as the time. Here, in both cases of FIGS. 50 and 51, game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, and the common reserved number is one. I will proceed with the explanation.

First, referring to FIG. 50, the case where the release waiting time of 2.5 sec is selected will be described. When the second opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t61, the reservation information reserved in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb is shifted to the execution area AE, and the success/failure determination is performed. will be It is assumed that the result of the suitability determination in this case is the normal open result. After execution of the suitability determination, the opening standby of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started, and the state is continued until the opening standby time (2.5 sec) elapses.

When the opening waiting time elapses at timing t62, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state. Also, at timing t62, the first opening/closing execution mode is started as the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened. At timing t63 after the opening time (0.5 sec) has passed from timing t62, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the open state to the closed state. After the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, the end of the first opening/closing execution mode is waited until timing t66 when the waiting time at the end (3.5 sec) elapses. During the first opening/closing execution mode, when a game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192, it is activated and a V winning occurs. The elapsed time from the end timing (timing t61) of the second opening/closing execution mode to the end of the first opening/closing execution mode is 2.5 seconds, which is the waiting time for opening, and 0, which is the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168. 0.5 sec and 3.5 sec, which is the waiting time at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode, are added to give 6.5 sec.

Also, at timing t64 when 3.5 seconds have passed since the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (timing t61), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the stored state of the game balls in the accessory device 150 is released, and the stored released balls start moving toward the V prize sensor 192 . The storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 at timing t65 when about 2 seconds have passed since the storage release.

In this case, the arrival timing is 5.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode, and the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode (timing t66) is 6.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode. ). Therefore, when the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192, a V winning occurs, and the second opening/closing execution mode is newly started.

In this way, the game balls stored during the second opening/closing execution mode remain even after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, and the storage is released after the lapse of a predetermined period, so that the second opening/closing execution mode is performed by the stored balls. It can be extended. As a result, it is possible to increase the pleasure when the prize-winning balls are stored, and to improve the amusement.

After the second opening/closing execution mode ends, when waiting for release of storage, a notification indicating the timing of release of storage and the waiting time until the timing is sent to the pattern display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, the speaker unit 64, etc. It is good also as a structure performed by. For example, when notifying with the pattern display device 51, it is preferable to perform a specific display or display the waiting time at the timing of release of the reserve. In the case of displaying the waiting time, it is possible to display the remaining waiting time until the accumulation cancellation timing not only at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, but also at a predetermined timing after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. good. Further, for example, a countdown display, a level gauge, or the like may be used to suggest a change in the remaining time, or to indicate the elapsed time after the second opening/closing execution mode ends. These notifications can be controlled by the display control device 100 that controls the pattern display device 51 and the effect control device 82 that controls the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64 .

Next, referring to FIG. 51, the case where the release waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected will be described. When the second opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t71, a decision is made based on the reserved information reserved in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb. It is assumed that the result of the suitability determination in this case is the normal open result. After execution of the suitability determination, the opening standby of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started, and this state continues until the opening standby time (0.5 sec) elapses. At timing t72 after the opening standby time has elapsed, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state, and the first opening/closing execution mode is started.

Also, at timing t73 when 3.5 seconds have passed since the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (timing t71), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the stored state of the game balls in the accessory device 150 is released, and the stored released balls start moving toward the V prize sensor 192 . The storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 at timing t75 when about 2 seconds have passed since the storage release.

On the other hand, the first opening/closing execution mode started at timing t72 is 4 seconds (0.5 sec, which is the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168, and 3.0 seconds, which is the waiting time at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode). 5 sec) ends at timing t74. Here, the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode is 4.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode, while the timing at which the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 is the second opening/closing execution mode. It is 5.5 sec from the mode end timing. In other words, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 after the first opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, even if the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192, it does not become valid and the V winning does not occur. Therefore, a new second opening/closing execution mode is not started.

In this way, when the opening standby time of 0.5 sec is selected, even if the first opening/closing execution mode is executed, the second opening/closing execution mode does not continue. Even in a situation where there is storage and there is a hold, the second opening/closing execution mode is not guaranteed. As a result, even if the game balls are stored and held, the player cannot relax, and it is possible to keep the player's attention on the development of the game until the new second opening/closing execution mode occurs.

In addition, since the ease with which the second opening/closing execution mode is continued varies depending on the selected opening standby time, it is possible to arouse strong interest in which opening standby time is selected after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

At that time, when the notification is made based on the pending digestion or the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 (when there is no hold), the case where the open standby time of 2.5 sec is selected and the open standby time of 0.5 sec is selected. In this case, it becomes difficult to estimate the open standby time from the notification, and it becomes difficult to predict the number of villas in advance. Therefore, the tension can be maintained until the storage release ball passes the V prize sensor 192 and the presence or absence of the consecutive game becomes clear. The notification may be performed as a display effect by the pattern display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63, or may be performed as an audio effect by the speaker unit 64. FIG.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, but there may be cases where no storage occurs. That is, in the final round in the second opening/closing execution mode, the second distribution member 310 is not fixed to the distribution state side, and the distribution state and non-distribution state are determined according to the distribution pattern table shown in FIG. 34(b). The minutes are controlled by switching to and from the state. Therefore, depending on the winning timing of the game ball to the accessory device 150, the final round (second opening/closing execution mode) may end without the winning ball being distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. With such a configuration, it is possible to arouse a sense of tension that the second opening/closing execution mode may end in a state where there is no storage. performance can be improved.

Next, the execution timing of remaining ball determination will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of remaining ball determination.

In the present embodiment, (1) the case where the first opening/closing execution mode is not executed when the judgment waiting time has passed and (2) the case where the first opening/closing execution mode is executed when the judgment waiting time has passed. , the execution timing of the remaining ball determination is different.

(1) If the first opening/closing execution mode has not been executed when the judgment waiting time has elapsed, the judgment waiting time (6 sec) set at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 52(a). At timing t77, the determination of remaining balls is executed. In this case, even if the first opening/closing execution mode is executed after the second opening/closing execution mode is finished and before the determination standby time elapses, the ejection of the game ball from the accessory device 150 in the second opening/closing execution mode is not performed. , after all of the discharge of the game balls from the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode and the discharge of the game balls stored at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode from the accessory device 150 are completed. Remaining ball determination is executed (see flow from step S3010 to YES in step S3001 in FIG. 49). Therefore, if the game is played normally, the winning number and the discharged number will match, and the second opening/closing execution mode, the subsequent first opening/closing execution mode, and the end of the first opening/closing execution mode. The remaining ball determination can be performed appropriately by summarizing the entry and exit of the game ball in each situation of the discharge of the storage release ball.

FIG. 52(a) exemplifies the case where the first opening/closing execution mode is executed after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, but even if the first opening/closing execution mode is not executed, the remaining balls can be appropriately determined. It can be carried out. That is, since the determination of the remaining balls is performed after waiting for the discharge of the storage release balls, it is possible to perform the determination of the remaining balls after resolving the situation where the number of discharged balls is one less than the number of discharged balls that occurs at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. can.

On the other hand, (2) when the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the judgment waiting time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. At timing t78 when is completed, determination of remaining balls is performed. For example, in a configuration in which remaining balls are determined at timing t77, in the first opening/closing execution mode, if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 immediately before timing t77 and the winning ball is discharged after timing t77, The determination of remaining balls is executed in a state where the number of discharged balls is smaller than the number of prize-winning balls, and there is a risk of erroneously determining that there is an abnormality in the remaining balls. In this respect, with the configuration shown in FIG. 52(b), the determination of the remaining balls is performed after the discharge of the winning game balls in the first opening/closing execution mode is completed, so the erroneous determination can be suppressed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in that game balls can be stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode.

Briefly describing this embodiment, in this embodiment, winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the result of normal opening), and the mode ends. After that, the stored state is maintained for a predetermined period. Then, when a new first opening/closing execution mode occurs during the retention period of the stored state, the stored state is released, and a V prize is generated by the stored release ball. In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the description will proceed assuming that the upper limit of the number of shared reservations is 0, that is, the apparatus does not have a reservation function.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an opening timing table according to this embodiment. The opening timing table is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c of the ROM 113. FIG.

In the opening timing table, an opening standby time is defined in association with the opening type counter CS. Here, the waiting time for opening is the waiting time from winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 to opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 .

As shown in FIG. 53, in the release table according to the present embodiment, two types of release standby time, 0.5 sec and 2 sec, are set. "0" to "39" of the release type counter CS correspond to the open waiting time of 0.5 sec, and "40" to "99" of the open type counter CS correspond to the open waiting time of 2 sec. That is, the probability of selecting an open standby time of 0.5 sec is 2/5, and the probability of selecting an open standby time of 2 sec is 3/5, and the former probability is lower.

Next, among the various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81, those parts that are different from the first embodiment will be described.

First, in this embodiment, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 when the first opening/closing execution mode is executed is different from that in the first embodiment. The operation mode of the second distribution member 310 in this case is set in the second distribution setting process of step S1204 in the control start process of FIG.

In step S1204 in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 during execution of the first opening and closing execution mode is switched to the distribution state (mode of distributing game balls to the entrance guide section 215 side) set. Specifically, after a period TS1' (0 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, the non-distribution state is switched to the distribution state, and then the non-distribution state is restored after a period TS2' (0.3 sec). Then, the non-distribution state is set to be maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the first opening/closing execution mode, the winning game balls of the accessory device 150 can be distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side.

The operating mode of the shutter 221 during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode is set so that it is maintained in the closed state throughout the first opening/closing execution mode, as in the first embodiment.

Next, game control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54(a). FIG. 54(a) shows only the parts different from the game control process of FIG. 21, and the processes of steps S3201 and S3202 of FIG. , is executed as part of the game end processing.

If it is determined in step S807 that the standby time at the end has passed, that is, if it is the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode, the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S3201. determine whether or not there is This process determines whether or not a V prize has been won in the first opening/closing execution mode.

If the V winning flag is not stored, shutter setting processing is executed in step S3202. In this process, a standby time B is set until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state after the end of the first opening/closing execution mode. This standby time B corresponds to a period during which the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode are maintained in the stored state after the end of the first opening/closing execution mode. The standby time B is not particularly limited, but is set to 5 seconds, for example. Further, the maintenance period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49B, as in the sixth embodiment, the shutter processing of step S3101 is executed in the normal processing (FIG. 19). ing. The process of step S3101 is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 under the condition that neither the first opening/closing execution mode nor the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If it has passed, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process.

Returning to the explanation of the game control process in FIG. 54(a), if it is determined that the V winning flag is stored in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3203, and the shutter opening process for switching the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state is executed. Execute. According to this processing, when the V winning occurs in the first opening/closing execution mode, if game balls are stored in the accessory device 150, the storage is canceled and the stored balls are discharged from the accessory device 150. .

After execution of step S3203 or step S3202, the process advances to step S811 to execute processing for erasing the first open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG.

Next, the success/failure determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 54(b). FIG. 54(b) shows only the parts that are different from the validity determination process of FIG. 23, and the processes of steps S3301 and S3302 of FIG. , is executed when the result of the suitability determination is the normal open result.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the current game result is not a loss result (if it is a normal open result), a shutter setting process is executed in step S3301. In this processing, a waiting time A is set until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state after winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 . This standby time A corresponds to the closing period of the shutter 221 from when the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 occurs until the shutter 221 is opened. The opening of the shutter 221 based on the elapse of the standby time A is for allowing the storage release ball to reach the V winning sensor 192 in the first opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39 . For this reason, the waiting time A may be shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the "storage release ball movement time" from the "elapsed period from the winning to the end of the first opening/closing execution mode". .5 sec. Further, the maintenance period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

In the subsequent step S3302, processing for clearing the waiting time B set in the above step S3202 is executed. As a result, the operation of opening the shutter 221 scheduled after the waiting time B has elapsed is disabled (cancelled). In other words, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the operation openings 38 and 39 during the waiting time B, the shutter 221 is not opened even after the waiting time B has passed.

In the subsequent step S3303, it is determined whether or not a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. The determination standby flag indicates that execution of the remaining ball determination process is on standby after the first opening/closing execution mode ends. If the determination standby flag is stored, processing for deleting the determination standby flag is executed in step S3304. After step S3304 is executed, or if it is determined in step S3303 that the judgment standby flag is not stored, normal open command setting processing is executed in step S1107 (FIG. 23).

Next, the remaining ball determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. The process of FIG. 55 is executed in place of the remaining ball determination process of FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the processing during the second opening/closing execution mode (processing after step S2405 in FIG. 38) is the same as in the first embodiment, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the remaining ball determination process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. If the determination standby flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3402 to determine whether it is time to end the first opening/closing execution mode.

If it is the end timing of the first open/close execution mode, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not a V prize has occurred in the first opening/closing execution mode. If the V winning flag is not stored and the V winning has not occurred, the process advances to step S3404 to execute determination standby time setting processing.

The determination standby time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination process, and in this embodiment, it is the standby time from the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode. The judgment waiting time is the moving time (approximately 2 sec. ) is added, and is set to 7.5 sec, for example. In the subsequent step S3405, a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 as a standby state for remaining ball determination. After execution of step S3405, if a negative determination is made in step S3402 (if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode), or if an affirmative determination is made in step S3403 (if it is determined that the V winning flag is stored) ) terminates the remaining ball determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3401 that the determination standby flag is stored, the flow advances to step S3406 to determine whether or not the determination standby time set in step S3404 has elapsed. When the determination standby time has passed, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", and the remaining ball determination is performed. The remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S1503 in FIG. 27), and is decremented by 1 each time discharge of a game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. (step S1506 in FIG. 27).

If it is determined in step S3407 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process advances to step S3408 to determine that game balls remain in the accessory device 150, and that remaining balls are stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Store flags. After step S3408 is executed, or if it is determined in step S3407 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", in step S3409, the judgment standby flag stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased. . After that, this remaining ball determination processing is terminated.

It should be noted that when the normal opening result is determined at the time of winning the operation openings 38 and 39, in the previous step S3303 (FIG. 54(b)), it is determined whether or not the determination standby flag is stored. If so, the judgment standby flag is cleared in step S3304. When the determination standby flag is cleared, the determination of remaining balls in steps S3407 and S3408 is not performed even after the determination standby time has passed because a negative determination is made in step S3401 in FIG. That is, when a prize is awarded to the operation ports 38 and 39 during the determination standby (when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs), the remaining ball determination is disabled (cancelled).

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in the first opening/closing execution mode will be described. In this embodiment, the flow of the game is the case where the waiting time B for opening the shutter has passed without the first opening/closing execution mode occurring, and the case where the first opening/closing execution mode has occurred before the waiting time B has passed. is different. First, the case where the first opening/closing execution mode does not occur will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. It is assumed that 2 sec is selected as the waiting time for opening.

At timing t81, when the operation openings 38 and 39 are won, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state at timing t82 after the standby time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed. The shutter 221 is switched to the closed state again after the open state is maintained for 0.3 seconds.

At timing t83 after the opening standby time (2 sec) has passed from the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 (timing t81), the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. The second distribution member 310 is switched to the non-distribution state again after the distribution state is maintained for 0.3 seconds.

When the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at timing t84 immediately after timing t83, the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state at this time, so the winning ball is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. be done. At that time, since the shutter 221 is in a closed state, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side are stored in the entrance guide portion 215 .

After that, when the first opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t85, a waiting time B (5 seconds) for opening the shutter is set. Then, at timing t86 after the waiting time B has elapsed, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state, and the game balls are released from being stored. As a result, the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192 and passes through the V winning sensor 192 after about 2 seconds. However, since the first opening/closing execution mode has ended when the V winning sensor 192 passes, it is not treated as a V winning.

Next, the case where the first opening/closing execution mode occurs before the standby time B elapses will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. Note that the flow up to timing t85 when the first opening/closing execution mode ends is the same as in the case of FIG. 56, so description thereof will be omitted.

When the first opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t85, the standby time B (5 sec) for opening the shutter is set as described above. When the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 occurs at the timing t86' which is the timing before the waiting time B elapses, the waiting time B is cleared. As a result, the scheduled opening of the shutter 221 at timing t90', which is the timing at which the standby time B has elapsed, is disabled.

At timing t87' after the waiting time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed from timing t86', the shutter 221 is switched to an open state, and the game balls are released from being stored. Also, at timing t88' after the opening waiting time (2 sec) has passed from timing t86', the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state, and the first opening/closing execution mode is started. Here, the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode is 4 sec (the total time of the opening time of 0.5 sec and the waiting time at the end of 3.5 sec), and the storage canceling ball is used in the first opening/closing execution mode. After about 0.5 sec has elapsed from the start, the V winning sensor 192 is passed. That is, during the execution of the first opening/closing execution mode started from timing t88', the storage release ball passes through the V prize sensor 192, and a V prize is generated (timing t89'). As a result, transition to the second opening/closing execution mode occurs.

Thus, when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs before the standby time B elapses, the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the previous first opening/closing execution mode are used to execute the subsequent first opening/closing execution. It is possible to generate a V prize in the mode. That is, if a game ball is made to enter the operation ports 38 and 39 within the waiting time B, the second opening/closing execution mode will occur, so the transition to the second opening/closing execution mode occurs during the waiting time B. It will be an easy favorable period. As a result, the game after the end of the first opening/closing execution mode can be livened up, and the desire to continue the game can be aroused.

Although not shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, when a game ball wins in the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode from timing t83, the game ball reaches the rotating body 201, There is a possibility that a V win may occur in the first opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the state at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode is as follows: (a) V winning could occur; (b) V winning could not occur; It is possible to create three states of (c) V prize could not be generated and could not be accumulated. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement compared to the conventional pachinko machine which stays in two states of whether or not a V prize has been generated.

Next, the relationship between the opening waiting time and the game flow in the first opening/closing execution mode will be described. First, the flow when the waiting time for opening of 0.5 sec is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 58(a).

At timing t91, when the operation ports 38 and 39 are won, at timing t92 after the opening standby time (0.5 sec) has passed, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. In addition, timing t92 is also the timing when the waiting time A (0.5 sec) for opening the shutter has elapsed after the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39 has occurred, so at timing t92, the shutter 221 is opened from the closed state. state can be switched.

Thus, when the open standby time of 0.5 sec is selected, the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period during which the shutter 221 is in the open state overlap. Then, when the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing t93 during the overlapping period, the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then directly to the entrance guide section. It passes through 215 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192 . In other words, the route leading to the V winning sensor 192 through the entrance guide section 215 functions as a route that allows the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 to pass directly to the V winning sensor 192 .

The game ball flowing down the route reaches the V winning sensor 192 at timing t94, which is about 2 seconds after passing through the entrance guide portion 215. FIG. In other words, the V prize is generated in the first opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the accessory device 150 is generated.

Next, referring to FIG. 58(b), a description will be given of the flow when an open waiting time of 2 seconds is selected.

At timing t95, when the operation ports 38 and 39 are won, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state at timing t96 after the opening waiting time (2 sec) has passed. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. At that time, the shutter 221 is in the closed state, and the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period during which the shutter 221 is in the open state do not overlap. Therefore, the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 at timing t97, which is immediately after timing t96, is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then comes into contact with the shutter 221 and stops. , is stored in the entrance guide portion 215 .

In this way, depending on the waiting time for opening and closing, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide part 215 may win V prizes as they are, or may be stored. Of these, in the latter case, if the first opening/closing execution mode does not occur before the waiting time B elapses, it will not lead to the V winning, so the transition to the second opening/closing execution mode is not guaranteed. For this reason, the former, which wins the V as it is, is more advantageous for the player. Even if the distribution is to the same entrance guide part 215, the degree of advantage is different, so that the player's interest can be drawn to the development of the game after the distribution, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. be possible.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for storing winning game balls in the accessory device 150 is different from the above-described embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG.

FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of a rotator unit 180 that constitutes the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8, in the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment, the warp path 210, the second distribution member 310, the shutter 221 and the V guide path 260 shown in FIG. 8 are not provided. That is, all game balls that have won prizes in the accessory device 150 are guided to the ball sorting section 185 (see FIG. 9), and flow down either the left or right guide passage 183 . It should be noted that the ball sorting section 185 always guides the game balls that have reached the ball sorting section 185 to the left guide passage 183 in the same manner as in the above embodiments.

A first distribution member 300 is provided in the left guide passage 183 as in the above-described embodiments. As shown in FIG. 8, the first distribution member 300 is driven and controlled by the first distribution drive unit 300a to form a non-distribution state that constitutes a part of the floor of the guide passage 183 and the first distribution member 300. 1, the rear end of the distribution member 300 rotates downward about the rotation axis and is switched to a distribution state in which the distribution member 300 is inclined downward toward the removal passage 191b.

When the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, the game balls distributed to the left in the guide path 183 pass over the first distribution member 300 and reach the rotor 201 . On the other hand, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower outlet 182b side, the game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 is a rotating body Without reaching 201, it is directly guided to the removal passage 191b.

Returning to the description of the accessory device 150 in FIG. 59, an opening/closing member 400 for opening/closing the exit 182b is provided on the back side of the concave portion 182. As shown in FIG. The opening/closing member 400 has a substantially plate-like shape with a size corresponding to the opening 182 b and is movable along the side surface of the recess 182 . The opening/closing member 400 is connected to an opening/closing member driving portion 400a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the opening/closing member driving portion 400a is driven and controlled to set an open state in which the outlet 182b is opened and an open state in which the outlet 182b is opened. closed state to close the . The opening/closing member drive section 400 a is electrically controlled by the main controller 81 and driven by a drive signal from the main controller 81 .

When the opening/closing member drive unit 400a is not driven (is not in an excited state) and the opening/closing member 400 is in the open state, the game ball distributed to the outlet guide unit 203 by the rotating body 201 is released. It can pass through the port 182b and is guided to the removal passage 191b. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member driving portion 400a is driven (excited) and the opening/closing member 400 is in the closed state, even if the game ball received in the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the outlet 182b. , cannot pass through the exit 182b. In this case, the state in which the game ball is received in the outlet guide portion 203 is continued, and the game ball is stored in the outlet guide portion 203 .

Nine outlet guide portions 203 are provided, and each outlet guide portion 203 is configured to be able to receive one game ball. Therefore, it is possible to store a total of nine game balls.

It should be noted that the opening/closing mechanism such as the opening/closing member 400 and the opening/closing member driving section 400a is not provided in the V winning opening 182a. That is, the V winning opening 182a is always open so that the game ball can pass through. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the V winning opening guiding portion 204 are guided to the V winning opening 182a and the V winning passage 191a as the rotating body 201 rotates. In other words, the game ball received by the V winning opening guide section 204 is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 without being stored after reaching the V winning opening 182a.

Next, among the various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81, those parts that are different from the first embodiment will be described.

As already explained, since the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment does not include the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221, the present embodiment does not require processing related to drive control thereof. For this reason, for example, processing for driving and controlling the second distribution member 310 using the second distribution pattern table (FIG. 34) (step S1204 in FIG. 24, etc.) and processing for driving and controlling the shutter 221 (step S1204 in FIG. 24). Step S1205, step S2112 in FIG. 35, etc.) are omitted, and these processes are not executed.

Setting processing for each round according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60(a) shows only the parts that are different from the setting process for each round in FIG. 30, and the processes in steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. will be The setting process for each round is executed at the start of the round game (see step S1705 in FIG. 29).

After the corresponding round pattern setting process (the opening/closing pattern setting process for each round) is executed in step S1804, the opening/closing member 400 setting process is executed in step S3701. This process sets the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 in each round.

Here, the processing of step S3701 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60(b). In the process of step S3701, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15". Since the value of the first round counter RC1 being "15" means the second round of the round game (first round in the second opening/closing execution mode) (see step S1608 in FIG. 28), in step S3801, Basically, it is determined whether or not the round game is the second round.

If it is determined that the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15", that is, if the round game is the second round, the process proceeds to step S3802, and the closed state is maintained throughout the round game of the second round. The operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so as to maintain. That is, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide section 203 in the second round of the round game are stored in the outlet guide section 203 until the second round of the round game is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "15", the process advances to step S3803 to determine whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "3" or more and "14" or less. determine whether That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be executed is one of the 3rd round to the 14th round.

When the value of the first round counter RC1 is "3" or more and "14" or less, in step S3804, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round game, the game is closed, and then a predetermined open period. The operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that it remains open for a period of time and then remains closed until the end of the round game. Therefore, in the round game from the 3rd round to the 14th round, the game balls distributed to the exit guide part 203 are stored in the exit guide part 203 until a predetermined period has passed since the start of the round game. After that, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state, thereby canceling the stored state. Then, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the closed state again, and the game balls distributed to the exit guide portion 203 are stored in the exit guide portion 203 during the remaining period of the round game.

The predetermined period for maintaining the closed state is arbitrary as long as it is shorter than the execution period of the round game for one round. On the other hand, the open period for maintaining the open state is also arbitrary, but when all the game balls stored in the exit guide part 203 are discharged, the period is longer than the period during which the rotating body 201 makes one revolution. There is a need. In the present embodiment, when the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 is increased so that it rotates once in 1 sec, and the open period is set to 1.5 sec.

If it is determined in step S3803 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not less than "3" and not less than "14", the process advances to step S3805 to determine whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be executed is the 15th round (the round game one round before the final round).

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "2", in step S3806, after the closed state until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game, it will be open for a predetermined open period, After that, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the open state is maintained until the end of the round game. Therefore, in the 15th round game, the game balls distributed to the exit guide part 203 are stored in the exit guide part 203 until a predetermined period has passed since the start of the round game. The storage state is released by switching the opening/closing member 400 to the open state. After that, the state in which the storage is canceled continues until the end of the round game. The predetermined period in this step is arbitrary, but in this embodiment, it is set to the same length as the predetermined period in step S3804.

If it is determined in step S3806 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "2", it means that the round game to be executed is the 16th round (final round). In this case, in step S3807, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so as to maintain the open state throughout the 16th round of the round game. That is, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide part 203 in the 16th round game are ejected to the outside of the accessory device 150 as the rotating body 201 rotates. After executing the processes of steps S3802, S3804, S3806, and S3807, the setting process of the opening/closing member 400 ends.

Returning to the description of the setting process for each round in FIG. 60(a), after executing the process of step S3701, the setting process for rotating bodies is executed in step S3702. As already described, this embodiment is configured to rotate the rotating body 201 at high speed in accordance with the switching of the opening/closing member 400 to the open state, and this step performs the setting process. In the present embodiment, since setting processing for rotating bodies is performed for each round, step S1609 (setting processing for rotating bodies) in the game state transition processing of FIG. 28 is not executed.

In step S3702, whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is greater than or equal to "2" and less than or equal to "14" (whether the round game to be executed is any of the 23rd round to the 15th round) is determined, and if an affirmative determination is made, the operating mode of the rotating body 201 is such that high-speed rotation is performed over a high-speed rotation period (1 sec) after a predetermined period (the same period as the predetermined period in step S3804) has elapsed. set.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made by the above determination, that is, if the round game to be executed is the second round or the 16th round, the normal rotation speed (one lap in 5 sec) is maintained throughout the round game , the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set. After executing step S3702, step S1805 of FIG. 30 (processing for setting the upper limit number of prizes to be awarded to the accessory device 150) is executed.

Next, the round update processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) show only the parts that are different from the round update process of FIG. The process of step S3901 in FIG. 61A is performed after step S2206 in FIG. 36, and the process in step S3902 in FIG. 61B is performed after step S2209 in FIG. The round update process is performed when the number of winning prizes to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number of winning prizes (9) in the round game, or when the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit number of times (19 times). (See step S1712 in FIG. 29).

First, the closed setting processing of the opening/closing member 400 in step S3901 of FIG. 61(a) will be described. This process sets the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 in the closing period (round interval) between rounds. In step S3901, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the opening/closing member 400 is in the closed state throughout the closing period. Therefore, when the game balls are stored in the exit guide part 203 at the end of the previous round, the stored state is maintained even after the transition to the closing period, and the state is taken over to the next round as it is. After execution of step S3901, the process advances to step S2207 of FIG. 36 (round update command setting processing).

Next, the open setting processing of the opening/closing member 400 in step S3902 of FIG. 61(b) will be described. This process sets the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 during the ending period. In step S3902, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the opening/closing member 400 is in the open state throughout the ending period. Therefore, even if game balls are stored in the exit guide part 203 at the end of the previous round, those stored balls are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 during the ending period. After execution of step S3902, the process proceeds to step S2210 (ending command setting processing) in FIG.

Next, the processing for the internal role product action unit according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61(c). FIG. 61(c) shows only the parts that are different from the process for the internal action part of the character product in FIG. It is executed instead. It should be noted that the process for the action part inside the accessory is executed in step S1615 of the game state transition process in FIG.

In the processing for the internal action part of the role product, if a negative determination is made in step S1401 (processing for determining whether or not it is time to control the first distribution member 300), or step S1402 (processing for controlling the driving of the first distribution member 300) is executed, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the opening/closing member 400 (control timing). If it is the displacement timing, an opening/closing control process is executed in step S4102. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the opening/closing member driving section 400a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the opening/closing member driving portion 400a is grasped, and if it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the opening/closing member 400 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the opening/closing member driving portion 400a is not in the driving state, it starts driving to displace the opening/closing member 400 from the open state to the closed state. If a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after execution of step S4102, the process proceeds to step S1407 (rotating body control processing).

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a timing chart for explaining the game flow in the second opening/closing execution mode. Here, the third and fourth rounds of the round game will be described as an example. The execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is assumed to be the continuous variation mode, and the description will proceed on the assumption that the V winning occurs at some timing of the third round and the fourth round is carried out.

At timing t102 after 5 seconds have elapsed from timing t101 when the third round game is started, the opening/closing member 400 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the exit 182b is opened. This state is maintained until timing t103 after 1.5 seconds. Further, as already explained, during the period from timing t102 to t103, the rotating body 201 rotates at a high speed so as to make one revolution in 1 sec.

Therefore, the game balls stored in the exit guide section 203 at timing t102 are guided to the exit 182b and discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 until timing t103. As a result, the state of the rotating body 201 at timing t103 is, as shown in FIG. It is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls also.

Then, at timing t103, the opening/closing member 400 is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the outlet 182b is closed. As a result, in the rotating body 201, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide portion 203 can be stored. Such a state continues until timing t106 when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fourth round. Therefore, when the game ball is stored in the exit guide part 203 at the timing t104 when the third round ends, it is taken over at the timing t105 when the fourth round starts.

At timing t104, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), when game balls are stored in four outlet guide portions 203, these outlet guide portions 203 are blocked by the stored balls. As a result, it becomes impossible to accept new game balls. Therefore, at the timing t105 when the fourth round is started, the total number of the ball guiding portions 202 capable of accepting game balls is six including the V winning opening guiding portion 204. FIG. As a result, the V winning rate (probability that the game ball that has reached the rotating body 201 is distributed to the V winning hole guide section 204) at the start of the fourth round becomes 1/6.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(c), for example, most of the game balls that have won the accessory device 150 are distributed to the outlet 182b by the first distribution member 300, and the outlet for storing the game balls is provided. When the number of the guide portions 203 remains at one, the total number of the ball guide portions 202 capable of receiving game balls is nine at the timing t105 when the fourth round starts. The V winning rate in this case is 1/9, which is lower than in the case of FIG. 62(b).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the advantage at the start of the fourth round changes depending on the number of game balls distributed to the exit guide section 203 after timing t103 of the third round. Therefore, the period A from timing t103 to t104 is a period for increasing the number of exit guide portions 203 in which game balls are stored in order to start the fourth round advantageously.

A period B from timing t105 at which the fourth round is started to timing t106 at which the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state is a period in which players aim to win a V prize while benefiting from the savings accumulated in the period A. Also in the period B, if the game balls are distributed to the vacant exit guide part 203, the game balls are stored in the guide part 203.例文帳に追加As a result, the total number of ball guide portions 202 capable of receiving game balls is further reduced, and the ratio of V winning opening guide portions 204 is increased. Therefore, in the period B, the closer the timing t106 at which the period ends, the higher the V winning rate and the more likely the V winning occurs.

Incidentally, if the V prize is simplified too much, there are adverse effects such as the meaning of providing the continuous variation mode being lost and the attractiveness of the V prize being reduced. For this reason, it may be desirable that V winning is difficult to some extent. It is possible to increase the number. However, in these cases, the structures of the rotating body 201 and the exit guide part 203 are complicated, and there is a risk of increasing the burden of designing the accessory. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 reduces the number of game balls heading toward the rotating body 201, so the number of exit guide portions 203 and the number of game balls to one exit guide portion 203 It is possible to reduce the number of balls received. As a result, while simplifying the configuration of the rotating body 201 and the exit guide portion 203, it is possible to maintain a certain level of V-winning difficulty.

When the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state at timing t106, the state is maintained for 1.5 seconds. As a result, the storage of the game ball is released, and the state of the rotating body 201 becomes a state in which none of the nine outlet guide portions 203 receive the game ball, as shown in FIG. 62(a).

At that time, the design display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, the speaker unit 64, or the like may notify the timing of the release of the storage and the period until the timing. For example, when notifying by the pattern display device 51, it is preferable to perform a specific display at the timing of releasing the reserve, or display the period at the start of the round, at the round interval immediately before that, or at a predetermined timing after the start of the round. Further, for example, a countdown display, a level gauge, or the like may be used to suggest a change in the remaining time, or to indicate the elapsed time from the start of the round. These notifications can be controlled by the display control device 100 that controls the pattern display device 51 and the effect control device 82 that controls the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64 .

At timing t107 after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from timing t106, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the closed state, and this state is maintained until timing t108 when the fourth round ends. Therefore, timings t107 to t108 are period A for increasing the number of outlet guiding portions 203 in which game balls are stored in order to make the fifth round advantageous, as in the case of timings t103 to t104.

After that, the 5th round game is performed in the same manner as the 4th round above, and thereafter, the first half of the round game is the period B in which the benefit of the previous round is obtained, and the second half is reserved for the next round. is repeated until the 14th round.

By the way, if the V prize does not occur during the period B from timing t105 to t106, the V prize must be aimed at during the period A from timing t107 to t108. As described above, at the timing t107, the accumulation up to that point is reset, so it is assumed that the V winning rate in the period A will be lower than that in the period B. In other words, by setting the retention release timing in the middle of the round game, it is possible to switch from a state in which it is easy to win a V prize to a state in which it is difficult to win a V prize in the round game. In this way, since the period during which the V prize is preferentially treated is limited to the middle of the round game, the round game can proceed under a sense of tension that the preferential treatment period may end without the V prize occurring. Improves interest.

By the way, in order to establish the continuation condition in the round game, it is sufficient for the game ball to pass through the V prize sensor 192 once, and it is not necessary to pass it repeatedly. In addition, unlike the exit guide section 203, the V winning opening guide section 204 does not store game balls. Therefore, even if the game balls are distributed to the V winning hole guide part 204 again after the occurrence of the V prize, the player will not receive any reward other than receiving the payout of the game balls. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the exit guide part 203 after the occurrence of the V prize, there is an advantage that not only the game balls are paid out but also the accumulation of the game balls is generated to make the next round game more advantageous.

That is, in the present embodiment, before the occurrence of the V winning, the V winning opening guiding section 204 is more advantageous than the exit guiding section 203, whereas after the occurrence of the V winning, the V winning opening guiding section 204 Also, the outlet guide portion 203 is advantageous. In other words, the advantageous relationship is reversed at the occurrence of the V prize, and novel game characteristics that have not existed in the past can be provided. In addition, in this configuration, two games, a game aiming at allocating to the V prize winning opening guide part 204 and a game aiming at allocating to the exit guiding part 203, can be realized in one round game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest compared to the conventional pachinko machine which only guarantees the former.

Next, the flow of the second round game will be described. In the second opening/closing execution mode, the round game of the second round, which is the first round, cannot be started in an advantageous state because game balls are not carried over (stored) from the previous round game. Therefore, in the 2nd round, unlike the 3rd to 14th rounds, the opening/closing member 400 is not switched to the open state and the storage is not released in the middle of the round game. Therefore, in the round game of the second round, the game balls can be stored in the exit guide part 203 using the entire round game. As a result, the V winning rate in the second round is increased, and early termination of the second opening/closing execution mode is suppressed. Since the game balls stored in the second round are taken over to the third round as they are, the game can be advanced particularly advantageously during the period B of the third round.

Next, the flow of the 15th round and 16th round game will be described. As already explained, in the fifteenth round, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state during the round game, but is not returned to the closed state after that, and is maintained in the open state until the end of the round. Therefore, in the fifteenth round, after the first half period B ends, the game balls are not stored thereafter. Further, in the 16th round, since the opening/closing member 400 is maintained in an open state throughout the round game, accumulation does not occur throughout the round game.

This is because the upper limit of rounds in the second open/close execution mode is set to 16 rounds, so even if a V win occurs in the 16th round, the next round is not carried out, and the second half of the 15th round and the 16th round This is because there is little significance in accumulating game balls at Also, if it remains in the accessory device 150 even after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes difficult to secure the timing for determining the remaining balls. easier to do.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the remaining balls are determined at the end of the ending. In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 400 is opened during the ending period. As a result, not only when the round game reaches the 16th round, but also when it ends in an intermediate round (for example, the 5th round), at the end of the ending (when executing the remaining ball determination), the accessory device A state in which all the game balls in 150 have been discharged can be achieved, and it is possible to appropriately determine the remaining balls.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The game balls distributed to the exit guide part 203 in the accessory device 150 can be stored, and the V winning rate of the next round game is increased by the stored balls. As a result, it is possible to play the previous and subsequent round games in cooperation with each other, and it is possible to improve the amusement compared to the conventional pachinko machine in which the game is independent for each round game.

Furthermore, the following effect is expected by using the outlet guide part 203 as a storage part. Normally, when a game ball is distributed to the receiving part for exit, the player feels only regret. , the outlet guide portion 203 is recognized as a useful receiving portion. As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that makes the player happy regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the V winning hole guide part 204 or the exit hole guide part 203, and it is possible to suitably increase the willingness to play. In addition, since the exit guide part 203, which has been conventionally only recognized as a disadvantage, functions as a receiving part that increases the degree of advantage, it is possible to add unexpectedness and give a fresh impression to the player. become.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the rotating body 201, the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are provided as various distribution means, but the configuration for distributing the game balls is arbitrary. Moreover, it is not limited to a dynamic distribution structure, and may be a static distribution structure such as a distribution passage or a crew.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls stored in the entrance guide portion 215 or the exit guide portion 203 are configured to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but may be configured to be invisible. In this case, it is not clear from the player's point of view whether or not there is an accumulation, and it is possible to add the fun of guessing this.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 in one specific game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) wins V in the next specific game. Although it is configured to pass through the sensor 192, it is not limited to this. For example, in view of the specific game in which the game ball has won the accessory device 150, the game ball may pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the next specific game. The point is that the winning ball in the previous specific game should pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the specific game executed later.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the number of incoming balls to the accessory device 150 and the number of ejected balls from the accessory device 150 are managed by one counter (remaining ball counter RPC). and a second counter for grasping the number of discharged balls may be provided, and the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls may be separately managed. In this case, the remaining ball determination can be performed based on determining whether or not the respective values of the first counter and the second counter match.

(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the end waiting time is provided in each round game in the second opening/closing execution mode. It may be shorter than the time until the ball is ejected from the accessory device 150 . With these configurations, game balls other than the game balls stored in the entrance guide portion 215 or the exit guide portion 203 can be carried over to the next round. However, even if the final winning ball in the round game (the game ball that won just before closing of the accessory device 150) passes through the V winning sensor 192, the passing will be after the round game ends, and the V winning will be invalidated. In consideration of possible situations, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

In addition, in the configuration in which the end waiting time is provided, the end waiting time may be set only when the number of winning prizes to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number. According to this configuration, for example, when the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit number of openings (limited to cases where the number of winning upper limits is not reached at the same time), the round game is promptly terminated. It is possible to shorten the waiting time until the next round game.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a standby time is provided at the end, when the number of winning prizes to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number of winning prizes, whether or not a V prize has occurred (or whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied). is determined, and if the V prize has already been generated, there may be a configuration in which the waiting time at the end is not provided (the waiting time at the end is set to 0 sec). This is because it is meaningless to wait for the final winning ball to pass the V when the V winning has already occurred.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a V winning occurs in the first opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing execution mode may be terminated based on the occurrence of the V winning. As a result, the second opening/closing execution mode can be started without waiting for the end waiting time to elapse, and the smooth progress of the game can be promoted. In this case, it is preferable to perform the determination of remaining balls after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the first opening/closing execution mode. At this time, by setting the predetermined period to be shorter than the opening period of the second opening/closing execution mode, the determination of remaining balls can be completed during the execution of the opening, and interference with the determination of remaining balls in the second opening/closing execution mode is avoided. can be suppressed. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the determination of remaining balls is not performed for the first opening/closing execution mode in which the V prize is generated, and performed collectively with the second opening/closing execution mode.

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, on the basis of winning to the operation ports 38 and 39, at least one of the main display unit 43 and the pattern display device 51 is configured to variably display the pattern, in other words, the lottery process is performed. A variable display may be started based on what is performed, and a game cycle may be executed in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is displayed and the variable display is terminated once. In this case, after the variable display is started based on the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39, the variable display is performed for the same period as the waiting time for opening, and then the pattern is stopped. The display mode of the pattern (result of stop display) in the case of stop display may correspond to the result of the lottery process (see FIG. 12) performed based on the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 .

(8) In each of the above embodiments, it is assumed that the pending information is acquired based on the winning of the respective operation ports 38 and 39, and the pending information is stored up to a predetermined number (four for each). As described above, the configuration may be such that the hold information is not stored. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of the configuration in which the number of reserved information based on the winning of the respective operation openings 38 and 39 is stored with an upper limit of 4, the number is less than 3. There may be more, or the number may be five or more, and the configuration may be such that the upper limit storage number of the pending information based on the prize winning to each operation port 38, 39 is different.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the number of pending information is displayed by the pending light emitting units 54 to 56, but it may be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. FIG. The symbol display device 51 is provided above the accessory device 150, and the player moves the game ball around the accessory device 150, such as winning the accessory device 150 and then winning the V prize. It is considered that the person is highly interested in the mode, and if the number of pending information is displayed in a place (that is, the display screen G) near the place where such interest is given, it will naturally come into view. it is conceivable that. In this way, information can be consolidated and the game can be made easier to understand, compared to a configuration in which separate notifications are made using various locations. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the type is notified on the display screen G. When notifying the type, the display of the information on the reserved number is deleted, or the type of the opening/closing execution mode is notified while the information on the reserved number is left. In the former case, when the type of open/close execution mode is being notified, even if you try to check the number of pending information, you may not be able to do so. Therefore, the notification of the type of opening/closing execution mode itself may be plain. Therefore, for example, if the display screen G is configured to display the number of pending information even while having the pending light emitting units 54 to 56, even if the display of the number of pending information is erased on the display screen G, at that time can be confirmed by the holding light emitting units 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed in accordance with the timing.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired as the reservation information when the operation openings 38 and 39 are won, and the type of opening/closing execution mode (jackpot type) is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. However, it is also possible to acquire a counter for determining the type of opening/closing execution mode at the time of V winning, and to determine the type of opening/closing execution mode based on the counter. In this way, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter to be used at the time of the V winning at the time of winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 even though the V winning has not occurred, thus simplifying the processing configuration. can be improved. However, for example, when determining the opening and closing pattern, the configuration reflects the type of opening and closing execution mode at the time of V winning. In the case of increasing/lowering the V winning rate, it is preferable to obtain a jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of opening/closing execution mode as the pending information. In addition, when opening/closing control is executed, or in advance notification, the type of opening/closing execution mode when V wins during opening/closing control corresponding to the pending information is notified (for example, "If you win here, you win 16R jackpot!") Also in display etc.), it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening and closing execution mode is acquired as the pending information.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the types of support by the electric accessory 39a are set so as not to differ, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the types of support differ. Specifically, for example, as a support mode, when compared in a situation where game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area, the electric accessory 39a of the second operation opening 39 opens per unit period. A low-frequency support mode (or a low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or a high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 39a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the open period of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 39a occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The period is set shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period (i.e., One display duration in the character object display section 44) is set to be short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 39 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 will be in the open state also increases, and the probability of winning a V prize (occurrence of a big win) also increases.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit period is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the secured period secured after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average period of the securing period and increasing the winning probability. .

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the height of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided as in each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration may be such that the electric accessory 39a and the through gate 41 themselves are not provided. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the second opening/closing execution mode is entered based on the occurrence of the V prize to the accessory device 150, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the same accessory device wins a prize. However, the second opening/closing execution mode may be executed by another winning device. For example, a variable ball entry device capable of displacing between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a ball is provided separately from the accessory device 150. , the main controller 81 controls the variable ball-entering device to be in the open state based on the occurrence of a V prize to the accessory device.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 always win the V prize. good too.

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 is discharged to the outside of the accessory device through the V winning passage 191a or the exit passage 191b, and the discharged game ball is discharged (not shown). Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the passage, it may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, when the power is restored from the game stop state based on the abnormality detection without operating the RAM erase switch 98a, the abnormality detection state and the game stop state are canceled. It is good also as the structure which does not carry out. In this case, a release switch for releasing the abnormality detection state and the game stop state is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and when the power is restored while operating the release switch by the staff of the game hall, the main control unit 81 may be configured to release the abnormality detection state and the game stop state. As a result, when the power is restored by operating only the power switch 92b, the game stop state can be continued even after the power is restored.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the prize ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the prize winning sensor 192, but the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the ball loss sensor 193. It is good also as a structure which pays out a prize ball based on that. However, considering the time lag from when a prize is won to the accessory device 150 until when the prize ball is paid out, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the accessory device 150 includes the opening/closing accessory 168, but the opening/closing accessory 168 may not be provided and the ball can be entered. In this case, the accessory device is, for example, "a specific area provided in the game area where the game ball can enter" or "a specific area provided in the game area and partitioned so that the game ball can enter". and so on.

(19) Each of the above embodiments can also be applied to the following configurations. For example, a predetermined condition has been established (for example, a lottery based on winning a prize to one of the operation ports 38, 39 has caused a shift to an open/close execution mode (so-called jackpot game) (jackpot result)) The lottery mode of the lottery process is a low-probability mode in which the probability of the lottery result causing the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a predetermined probability, and the above-described low probability mode. In a gaming machine having a high probability mode in which the lottery result is higher than the low probability mode, a game ball passes through the V winning opening 182a when the variable ball entry device is opened during the opening/closing execution mode (V By winning), the game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode may shift to the high probability mode (so-called V probability variable machine). Further, the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments corresponds to a so-called two-type pachinko machine, but the configuration of each embodiment can be applied to a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type game machine. may

(20) In the first to sixth embodiments, the warp passage 210 is arranged behind the rotating body 201, but it may be arranged laterally or in front of the rotating body 201. FIG. However, if it is arranged on the side, the width dimension of the accessory device 150 tends to increase, leading to narrowing of the downflow area of the game ball outside the accessory device. Considering this point, it is preferable to arrange it in the front or the rear so as to utilize the space in the front-rear direction. However, if it is arranged in the front, the visibility of the rotating body 201, which is of great interest to the player, is hindered, so it is preferable to arrange it in the rear as in the above embodiment. In this case, it does not necessarily have to be directly behind, and may be diagonally behind.

(21) In the first to sixth embodiments, the warp path 210 is provided to lead the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 to the V prize sensor 192 without passing through the rotating body 201. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 are guided to the rotating body 201 . In this case, the rotating body 201 is stopped at a predetermined position (for example, the position where the V winning opening guide section 204 faces the lead-out section 186) where the accumulated cancellation ball can be distributed to the V winning opening guide section 204 corresponding to the timing of the cancellation of the accumulation. With such a configuration, it is possible to stabilize the V winning rate of the storage release ball.

However, since it is necessary to control the movement of the rotating body 201 in consideration of both the game balls heading toward the rotating body 201 without being stored and the game balls heading toward the rotating body 201 after being stored, the control becomes complicated. The processing load on the main controller 81 may increase. In addition, considering that the game ball heading toward the rotating body 201 without being stored interferes with the game ball heading toward the rotating body 201 after being stored, and one of them may interfere with the V winning of the other. to the V winning sensor 192 is preferably independent. In light of these, the above embodiment is preferred.

Further, in the case where the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 are guided to the rotating body 201, the rotating body 201 may be rotated as usual. In this case, it is possible to avoid an increase in processing load due to complication of operation control. However, the number of game balls heading toward the rotating body 201 only increases by the amount of storage, and it does not become remarkably easy to win a V prize. As a result, storage becomes less attractive and less motivated to pursue it. From this point of view, the above embodiment is preferable.

(22) In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the game balls are stored in a stopped state, but the game balls may be stored while being moved. For example, a circulation path may be provided for circulating game balls that have entered the accessory device 150 without discharging them from the accessory device 150, and the game balls may be stored by moving within the circulation path. In this case, a lead-out unit capable of leading out the game balls moving in the circulation path to the V winning sensor 192, and a sorting means for sorting the game balls in the circulation path to the side of the lead-out part and to the side that continues to move the circulation path. , should be provided. By controlling the distribution timing of the distribution means (the timing of distribution to the lead-out section side), the storage can be released at an appropriate timing.

(23) In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the period from when the stored ball is released to when the stored ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 is a fixed period (approximately 2 seconds). However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration that diversifies the above period (a configuration in which the timing of passing the V prize sensor 192 is different even if the timing of canceling the accumulation is the same).

For example, as the above period, at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period are configured to occur. In the period, the V winning sensor 192 can be passed after the end of the next round game. When the storage release ball passes through the V prize sensor 192 after the next round game ends, it may be configured to pass through the V prize sensor 192 at the round interval between the next round game, or the V prize sensor 192 in the next round game. It may be configured to pass through the winning sensor 192 . In the former case, no V prize is generated by the storage release ball, and in the latter case, implementation of the next round is decided. In the first period, the storage release ball may pass through the V winning sensor 192 before the start of the next round game, and in the second period, passing the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game. . In these cases, since the game development after the release of storage is randomized, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball released from storage.

As a configuration for diversifying the period until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192, it is preferable to provide a period variable means such as a churne between the storage section and the V winning sensor 192. FIG. Further, instead of the cloon, a plurality of ball passages having different passage lengths to the V prize sensor 192 and distribution means for distributing the game balls released from storage to the plurality of ball passages may be provided.

(24) In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the configuration is such that the game balls are retained in the accessory device 150 by accumulating them. For example, by providing a movement path that takes a long time to reach the V winning sensor 192 and moving within the movement path, the game ball that won the accessory device 150 in the previous specific game (round game, etc.) It may be configured to pass through the V winning sensor 192 in a later specific game.

(25) In the first to sixth embodiments, one game ball can be stored, but a plurality of game balls may be stored.

(26) In the above-described first embodiment, the storage is canceled at the end of the round game, but the storage may be released before the end. Also, the reserve may be released after the next round game is started, or the reserve may be released during the closing time (round interval) between rounds. In short, it is sufficient that the game ball that won in the previous round game can pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the later round game, and the release timing of the accumulation is arbitrary. However, if the storage is released after the next round game is started, the player can not only release the storage, but also check whether the game ball wins the accessory device 150 or whether the winning ball wins the V prize. It becomes necessary to pay attention and it becomes rushed. For this reason, it is easy to miss the release of the reserve, and in view of this point, it is preferable to release the reserve at the round interval at the end of the round game before the game settles down or at the end of the game.

(27) In the first embodiment, the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state in the first opening/closing execution mode, and the game ball is not guided to the entrance guide portion 215 (warp passage 210) side. However, the second distribution member 310 may be driven to switch between the distribution state and the non-distribution state to distribute game balls to the entrance guide section 215 side. In this case, if the shutter 221 is further opened, the game ball passes through the entrance guide portion 215, and the warp passage 210 can be utilized as a straight V route.

(28) In the above-described first embodiment, it may be configured such that whether or not game balls can be stored during a round game differs depending on the type of jackpot. For example, a jackpot A and a jackpot B are provided, and in the case of the jackpot A, game balls can be stored during the round game, and in the case of the jackpot B, it is impossible to do so. In addition, it may be configured such that the rounds in which game balls can be stored and the number of rounds differ depending on the type of jackpot.

(29) In the above-described second embodiment, the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state in the 5th, 10th and 16th rounds so that the winning balls are not stored. However, the second distribution member 310 may be switched between the distribution state and the non-distribution state while the shutter 221 is maintained in the open state. In this case, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 pass through the V winning sensor 192 via the warp passage 210 without being stored in the entrance guide section 215. . That is, the distributed game balls are not carried over to the next round game, and pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which the winning occurs.

(30) In the second embodiment, instead of or in addition to the 5th, 10th and 16th rounds, the round (15th round) immediately preceding the upper limit round (16th round) cannot be stored. A configuration may be adopted in which the remaining balls are determined in response to the end of the previous round. Even if the game ball wins V in the upper limit round, the next round is not executed, and there is little merit in accumulating the game ball in the previous round, but by adopting the above configuration, the player's profit is increased. It becomes possible to execute the remaining ball determination in the middle of the big win without damaging the ball.

(31) In the above-described third embodiment, the execution timing for judging remaining balls is set based on the elapsed time from the start of the round game, but may be set based on the elapsed time from the release timing of the pool . In this case, if the period from the cancellation of the storage until the determination of the remaining balls is set longer than the period until the storage-cancelled ball reaches the V-winning sensor 192, the storage-cancelled ball is released from the accessory device 150 Remaining ball determination can be executed after being ejected.

(32) The following configuration may be used instead of the third embodiment. In the above-described third embodiment, although it is possible to determine the number of remaining balls in each round, the winning of prizes to the accessory device 150 is restricted by the short-open mode, so the player has the impression that winnings are unlikely to occur. may give Therefore, first, a configuration is adopted in which the short open mode is not executed. Then, the entrance guide part 215 and the second retention means capable of causing the game ball entering the accessory device 150 to stay in the accessory device 150 and the second retention releasing means for releasing the retention. Provided separately from the shutter 221, the round game is started in a state in which the game balls can be retained in the second retention means, and retention is released after a predetermined period of time has passed. Further, an entrance sensor 179 is provided downstream of the second retention means, and the game balls retained by the second retention means are not counted as won (not detected by the entrance sensor 179). In this case, if it is configured such that "passing of the storage-cancelled ball through the V winning sensor 192 and determining the remaining ball (the remaining ball is determined after the storage-cancelling ball wins the V prize)" is performed within the above-mentioned predetermined time period, the accessory device 150 The remaining ball counter RPC is updated based on the winning of the game ball after the execution of the remaining ball determination. In other words, it is possible to allow winning to the accessory device 150 while avoiding interference with the judgment of the remaining balls, and to make the player feel that it is difficult to win while making it possible to judge the remaining balls for each round. can be suppressed.

In the above configuration, the second retention means may be provided on the upstream side of the entrance guide portion 215 and the shutter 221, or may be provided on the downstream side. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a short opening mode in the said structure. In this case, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a mismatch between the number of prizes won and the number of discharges when a prize is won in the short open mode.

(33) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the accumulation is canceled based on the number of prizes awarded to the accessory device 150 reaching a specific number (eight). It may be configured to be released. In this case, it is possible to cope with a case where winning to the accessory device 150 is not easily generated and the round game ends before the number of winnings does not reach the specific number. In the fourth embodiment, the specific number is set to 8 (one less than the upper limit winning number), but the specific number is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit winning number may be the specific number. .

(34) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the special storage cancellation is performed only in the second round game, but it may be configured to be performed in a round game other than the second round. In this case, it may be performed in all rounds, or may be configured to be performed in some rounds. In the latter case, after predetermining a round to be executed as a special retention cancellation, when executing the second opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the round game is the predetermined round, and the result is affirmative. It is preferable to control the operation of the shutter 221 so as to perform a special storage release when the determination is made. This allows some rounds to be given preferential treatment. In this case, different notifications may be made depending on whether the round with such preferential treatment is executed or when the round without such treatment is executed, or only the former may be configured as a specific notification. These notifications may be performed as a display effect by the pattern display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63, or may be performed as an audio effect by the speaker unit 64. FIG.

(35) In the fifth embodiment, when the specific round is executed, after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, game balls can be stored for a predetermined period of time, and the specific round is not executed. In addition, it may be configured such that the game balls cannot be stored after the second opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, as a benefit for continuing the round game up to a specific round, it is possible to provide a consecutive house chance in the second opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the game goal of continuing the game in the second opening/closing execution mode until a specific round is added, and the interest in the second opening/closing execution mode can be enhanced. The specific rounds are not particularly limited, but are preferably rounds (eg, 10 rounds) less than the upper limit rounds (16 rounds). In this case, it is possible for the player to set the game goal step by step, such as continuing until at least a specific round, preferably continuing until the upper limit round.

In addition, when the specific round is executed, it becomes impossible to store the game balls after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the specific round is not executed, after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, a predetermined period of time A configuration may be adopted in which game balls can be stored over a period of time. In this case, as a relief when the second opening/closing execution mode ends in a small number of rounds, it is possible to provide a consecutive house chance for the second opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the specific round is also arbitrary, but in order to prevent the intentional end of the round in the middle, it is preferable to set it to, for example, about four rounds.

It should be noted that the switching of storage availability can be performed, for example, by controlling the operation mode of the shutter 221 in the ending period. Specifically, the shutter 221 is closed during the ending period when storage is permitted, and the shutter 221 is opened during the ending period when storage is disabled.

(36) In the above-described fifth embodiment, it may be configured such that whether or not game balls can be stored after the second opening/closing execution mode is completed differs depending on the type of jackpot. For example, a jackpot A and a jackpot B may be provided, and in the case of the jackpot A, the storage is possible, and in the case of the jackpot B, the storage is disabled.

In this case, different notifications may be made depending on whether the jackpot A is executed or the jackpot B is executed, or only the former may be configured to have a specific notification. These notifications may be performed as a display effect by the pattern display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63, or may be performed as an audio effect by the speaker unit 64. FIG. In addition, when the jackpot type is sorted based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, which jackpot type will be determined when the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 occurs or when the reservation is completed. comprehensible. In this case, the notification may be made not only in the second opening/closing execution mode, but also in the first opening/closing execution mode or its opening standby time.

(37) In the fifth embodiment, if there is a hold at a specific timing during the second opening/closing execution mode, read ahead the hold information or the opening standby time corresponding to the hold information ( The pending information and the corresponding open standby time are specified at the timing before the pending information is subject to the lottery process such as the determination of success or failure), and the notification is performed based on the result of the prefetching. good. For example, when an opening waiting time of 2.5 seconds is expected, a special announcement (for example, "jackpot If there is a stock of balls at the end of the game, a chance to play consecutive games!", etc.) can be performed.

In this case, before the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, the player can grasp that there is an advantage if there is storage at the time of the end, and that there is a high possibility that there is a high possibility of a continuous villa. Motivation to end the 2-open/close execution mode increases. This makes it possible to increase the importance of the final round and enjoy the second opening/closing execution mode until the end. In addition, since the presence of the hold information allows for prefetching, it is possible to increase the motivation to cause the hold.

In addition, when the waiting time for opening of 0.5 sec, which is unlikely to be a continuous residence, is read in advance, a notification different from the above special notification may be performed, or a configuration may be adopted in which no particular notification is performed. Prefetching of the pending information may be performed by the main controller 81, or may be performed by a controller other than the main controller 81 (effect controller 82, etc.).

(38) In the fifth embodiment, the period from the end of the second opening/closing execution mode to the release of storage is made uniform, but one period is selected from a plurality of periods of different lengths. By doing so, the period until the release of the storage may be diversified. For example, a lottery process may be executed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the period may be determined based on the result. If the period until the release of storage is diversified, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the second opening/closing execution mode will continue. In addition, by randomizing the release timing of the storage, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming for a prize to the operation openings 38 and 39 in accordance with the release timing (when there is no reservation information at the end of the second opening and closing execution mode) ), making it easier to ensure the fairness of the game.

In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined notification indicating the period until the release of the storage is performed at a specific timing (for example, at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode). In this case, since it is possible to predict the release timing of the storage, it is possible to increase the willingness to generate the first opening/closing execution mode accordingly. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the release of the storage. Further, the configuration may be such that the predetermined notification is not performed. In this case, since it is difficult to predict the release timing of the storage, it is expected that the player will continue to watch the stored balls until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, in the above configuration, if there is hold information at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, notification is made based on the relationship between the opening waiting time corresponding to the hold information and the selected period until the release of the hold. may be For example, in the relationship between the two, when the second opening/closing execution mode continues or is highly likely to do so (when the storage release ball can or easily passes through the V winning sensor 192 during the first opening/closing execution mode), Special notification (for example, "Great chance if you can stock the balls at the end of the jackpot game!") may be performed. In addition, when the second opening/closing execution mode does not continue or when there is a high possibility of it (when the storage release ball cannot or cannot pass through the V winning sensor 192 during the first opening/closing execution mode), the above special notification and , different notification may be performed, or a configuration may be adopted in which no particular notification is performed.

Furthermore, when there is a hold at a specific timing during the second opening/closing execution mode, the hold information and the open standby time corresponding to the hold information are read in advance, and the result of the read ahead and the time until the selected hold release are read. It is good also as a structure which alert|reports based on relationship with a period. For example, in the relationship between the two, when the second opening/closing execution mode continues or is highly likely to do so, at a predetermined timing, which is any timing from after the prefetching to the end of the previous second opening/closing execution mode, the above-mentioned It can be configured to perform special notification.

(39) In the sixth embodiment, the suspension information is not stored even if the operation openings 38 and 39 win prizes during the opening standby time or the first opening/closing execution mode, but the suspension information is stored. It may be configured to be Further, as in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the first opening/closing execution mode, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state when a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, the standby time A is may be omitted and only the waiting time B may be used). In this case, for example, 4 sec is further provided as the opening standby time, and if it is 2 sec, the stored ball can pass through the V winning sensor 192 during the later first opening and closing execution mode, and if it is 4 sec, it is the later first opening and closing execution mode. The predetermined period is set so that the stored ball cannot pass through the V prize sensor 192 during the period.

Then, when there is a hold at a specific timing which is one of the timings from the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 to the end of the previous first opening/closing execution mode, it corresponds to the hold information and the hold information. It is preferable that the waiting time for opening is read in advance and notification is given based on the result. For example, when an open standby time of 2 sec is prefetched, a special notification (for example, "If you can stock a ball, it will be great Chance!”, etc.). In this case, the player can grasp that it is advantageous if there is accumulation in the first opening/closing execution mode, so that the desire to cause accumulation increases, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. be possible. In addition, since the presence of the hold information allows for prefetching, it is possible to increase the motivation to cause the hold. Note that when the opening waiting time of 4 seconds is read in advance, a notification different from the above special notification may be performed, or a configuration may be adopted in which no particular notification is performed.

(40) In the sixth embodiment, the standby time B may be diversified. This makes it possible to diversify the length of the advantageous period starting after the end of the previous first opening/closing execution mode, and to differentiate the advantageous degrees. In that case, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined notification suggesting the waiting time B (the period until the release of the storage) is performed at a specific timing (for example, at the end of the previous first opening/closing execution mode). In this case, since it is possible to predict the release timing of the storage, it is possible to increase the willingness to generate the first opening/closing execution mode accordingly. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the release of the storage. Further, the configuration may be such that the predetermined notification is not performed. In this case, since it is difficult to predict the release timing of the storage, it is expected that the player will continue to watch the stored balls until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

(41) In the seventh embodiment, winning balls to the accessory device 150 are distributed to the outlet guide section 203, and game balls are stored in the outlet guide section 203, which is advantageous. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a specific receiving portion provided in the accessory device 150 (receiving portion different from the exit guide portion 203 and the V winning gate guide portion 204) or a specific passing portion (outgoing sensor 193 and V winning sensor 192 are By distributing winning balls to different passing parts, the exit guide part 203 is closed (cannot accept winning balls), or the exit guide part 203 changes to the V winning opening guide part 204 to V. The configuration may be such that the number of the winning opening guide portions 204 is increased. In addition, as a configuration in which the exit guide part 203 changes to the V winning opening guide part 204, there are a first mode that guides the game ball received by the exit guide part 203 to the exit sensor 193 and a V winning sensor 192. A configuration can be considered in which derivation means capable of switching to the second mode and switching means for switching the mode of the derivation means from the first mode to the second mode are provided.

(42) In the seventh embodiment, the storage is canceled based on the lapse of a period of time. In this case, the storage can be canceled based on the number of wins reaching a predetermined number. For example, when it is difficult to win a prize to the accessory device 150, a state in which game balls can be stored in the exit guide part 203 without obtaining a sufficient opportunity to distribute them to the exit guide part 203 ( favorable conditions) may end. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the above state continues until the number of prizes won reaches a predetermined number, so that the opportunity to distribute to the exit guide section 203 can be appropriately secured.

Alternatively, the storage may be canceled based on the occurrence of the V prize. In this case, the earlier the V prize is won, the longer the period (period A) for increasing the number of stored balls for the next round, making it possible to advance the game more advantageously. For example, after the start of the next round game (period B), it is possible to immediately cancel the reserve when a V prize is won.

(43) In the seventh embodiment, when canceling the storage, it is configured to completely release (all the stored balls are discharged), but it is partially released (part of the stored balls are discharged). may be configured. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which produces the round game in which accumulation|storage is fully cancelled|released in the 2nd opening-and-closing execution mode, and the round game in which partial cancellation|release is carried out.

(44) In the seventh embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the round game that cannot be stored may occur in the middle of the second opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the determination of the remaining balls can be executed at the end of the round game in which the storage is not allowed, as in the second embodiment.

(45) In the seventh embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which accumulation can occur at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (accumulation occurs in the final round and may be maintained), and the stored ball may increase the V winning rate in the subsequent first opening/closing execution mode. In this case, as in the fifth embodiment, the storage may continue until a predetermined period of time elapses after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, or the first opening/closing after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. The configuration may continue until the number of times the execution mode is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. In the former case, the advantageous period (the period in which the V winning rate increases) can be defined by time, and in the latter case, it can be defined by the number of times the first opening/closing execution mode is performed. In the latter case, when the predetermined number of times is set to a plurality of times, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the number of storages can be increased. For example, when the predetermined number of times is set to 3 times, if the configuration is such that the game balls distributed to the outlet guide part 203 are stored in the first and second first opening/closing execution modes, storage can be added. , the V winning rate in the third first opening/closing execution mode can be further increased.

(46) In the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which accumulation can occur in the first opening/closing execution mode (the A configuration in which the game balls are stored in the exit guide portion 203) may be used. Thus, by allocating winning balls to the exit guide part 203 in the first opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to realize a game property in which the V winning rate is increased in the first opening/closing execution mode later. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the accumulation generated in the previous first opening/closing execution mode is caused by the elapse of a predetermined period from the end of the previous first opening/closing execution mode, or by the following first opening/closing execution mode. It can be canceled based on the occurrence of the open/close execution mode. Also, the above configurations (39) and (40) may be used.

(47) In the seventh embodiment, instead of or in addition to the first distribution member 300, the rotating body 201 may be provided with an outlet guide section 203 that cannot store game balls. In this case, there are an exit guide part 203 that can store game balls and an exit guide part 203 that cannot store game balls, and even if the deviation is the same, a difference can be provided in the degree of advantage. As a result, it is possible to add interest in anticipating the distribution to the former outlet guide portion 203 .

(48) In the above-described seventh embodiment, the storage is canceled for each round, but the storage may be maintained over a plurality of rounds (for example, 5 rounds). In this case, as the round game progresses, the number of outlet guide portions 203 that can accept game balls decreases, and the game property that the V prize increases can be realized. However, it is preferable to increase the number of exit guide portions 203 (for example, about 50) in order to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

(49) In the above-described seventh embodiment, one game ball can be stored per exit guide part 203, but a plurality of game balls may be stored.

(50) In the seventh embodiment, when a game ball is distributed to the exit guide section 203, the probability of distribution to the V winning opening guide section 204 in the subsequent round increases, and V winning occurs. After that, it is more advantageous for the player to be sorted to the exit guide section 203 than to be sorted to the V winning mouth guide section 204, but as another example, for example, the following configuration may be employed.

First, instead of detecting the winning ball by the winning sensor 192, the winning ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning sensor 192 and the sensor 193 for losing. Then, as shown in FIG. 63, the downstream side of the V-winning passage 191a is bifurcated, and the V-winning sensor 192 is arranged in the first passage 410, which is one of the branched passages, and the other branched passage. A game ball detection sensor is not arranged in the second passage 411. Further, at the branch point of both paths 410 and 411, a distributing member 412 for distributing game balls flowing through the V winning path 191a to the first path 410 and the second path 411 is arranged. The distribution member 412 is driven and controlled by a drive section (not shown), and the drive section is controlled by a control signal from the main controller 81 . On the other hand, the exit passage 191b is not provided with a branch passage or a distribution member, and all the game balls that have passed through the exit 182b are guided to the exit sensor 193.

In the above configuration, before the V winning occurs in one round game, the game balls that have passed through the V winning opening 182a are distributed to the first passage 410 side by the distribution member 412, and after the V winning occurs, the above game balls are distributed. The distribution mode of the distribution member 412 is switched so that the distribution member 412 distributes the balls to the second passage 411 side. As a result, when the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening guide section 204 before the V winning occurs, the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 and the winning balls (15 pieces) are paid out. When the game ball is sorted to the V winning hole guide section 204 after the occurrence of , the game ball is discharged without passing through the V winning sensor 192, and the prize ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the exit guide part 203 after the occurrence of the V prize, the game ball passes through the exit sensor 193 to pay out prize balls (15 pieces). In other words, in terms of the presence or absence of prize balls, there is no difference between the V winning hole guide part 204 and the exit hole guiding part 203 before the occurrence of the V prize, but after the occurrence of the V prize, it is sorted to the exit hole guiding part 203. A prize ball can be obtained only when the ball is won, and the exit opening guide part 203 is more advantageous for the player than the V winning opening guide part 204.例文帳に追加

For the purpose of grasping the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150, a discharge detection sensor for detecting the passage of game balls in the second passage 411 may be provided. In this case, even if the game ball is detected by the sensor, the prize ball may not be paid out. 3) may be paid out. In other words, when different advantageous degrees are provided depending on prize balls, it is not necessary to make one of the prize balls non-existent.

Further, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 63, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of winning balls changes before and after the occurrence of the V prize. Specifically, the prize balls are paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the V prize sensor 192 and the sensor 193 for loss. (For example, 15) prize balls pass through the sensor 193 for missing, while less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are obtained, after the occurrence of the V prize, the number of prize balls is reversed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are obtained by passing the V-winning sensor 192 and a smaller number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are obtained by passage of the missing sensor 193 . As another example, before the occurrence of the V prize, the same number of prize balls (for example, 10) can be obtained regardless of whether they pass through the V prize sensor 192 or the missing sensor 193, but after the occurrence of the V prize, , the number of prize balls when passing through sensor 193 for loss is greater than before occurrence of V prize (for example, 15), and the number of prize balls when passing through V prize sensor 192 is smaller than before occurrence of V prize. (for example, 0). With these configurations as well, after the occurrence of the V winning, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the exit opening guide section 203 than to distribute the game ball to the V winning opening guide section 204. - 特許庁

By the way, the game balls distributed to the exit guide part 203 in the various examples described above may or may not be stored as in the seventh embodiment. Further, the various examples described above can also be applied to a configuration in which a game ball can be entered into the accessory device without providing the opening/closing accessory 168, as in (18) above.

(51) The configurations described in the first to seventh embodiments and the other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. For example, the warp passage 210 in the first embodiment Also, the configuration of the second distribution member 310 and the configuration of the opening/closing member 400 in the seventh embodiment may be combined and applied. In addition, for the first to seventh embodiments, or for a configuration in which part or all of the first to seventh embodiments are combined with each other, each of the above-described other embodiments Some or all of the configurations may be applied in combination with each other.

(52) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reels are stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The following feature group is related to the background art that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine is known to have a variable ball entry device (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." There is a demand for a device to raise the level of attention to "."

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second opening and closing execution mode is started, the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first opening and closing execution mode, the normal opening result based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 a special game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by main control device 81);
a passing portion (V winning sensor 192) through which the game ball entered by the variable ball entering means can pass;
with
When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game, it is more advantageous to the player than when it does not pass (if it passes in the round game of the continuous variation mode, the next round game is executed, the first The second opening/closing execution mode is executed when passing in the opening/closing execution mode),
When the specific game is executed over a plurality of times, the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the specific games of the plurality of times is the first Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, second distribution by main controller 81 that allows passage through the passage part in the second specific game executed after the specific game A game machine characterized by comprising a function of controlling the operation mode of the member 310 and the shutter 221).

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and the game in which the variable ball entry means is entered is executed. When the ball passes through the passing portion, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the passage portion. Usually, the game ball can pass through the passing portion which becomes an advantageous hole is limited to the specific game in which the ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. In this case, with the end of the specific game, there is a possibility that the expectation of an advantageous state will disappear.

In this respect, in this configuration, when the specific game is executed over a plurality of times, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the previous first specific game is the second specific game after that. It is configured to be able to pass through the passing portion. In this case, if the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the game ball continues the chance to be in an advantageous state even after the first specific game is finished. Therefore, compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the chance ends when the first specific game ends, it is possible to enhance the continuation of expectation and interest.

In addition, in the above feature A1, when "a passing portion (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means can pass is provided, and the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game In addition, it is more advantageous for the player than when it does not pass (if the round game is passed in the continuous variation mode, the next round game is executed, and if it is passed in the first opening and closing execution mode, the second opening and closing execution mode is executed)" is replaced with "as a passing portion through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means can pass, the first passing portion (V winning sensor 192) is different from the first passing portion. Distributing means (rotating body 201 ), and when a game ball entered into the variable ball entry means is sorted to the first passing portion by the sorting means, it is more advantageous for the player than when it is sorted to the second passing portion. (The next round game is executed when the round game in the continuous variation mode is passed, and the second opening/closing execution mode is executed when the first opening/closing execution mode is passed.) good.

Feature A2. Means (second distribution member 310, guide passage 183, rotation The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it comprises a body 201).

According to the above configuration, the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means in the first specific game can pass through the passage part in the second specific game later, and the second specific game later. A game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in a game can pass through the passage part as it is in the second specific game. Therefore, in obtaining an advantageous state in the second specific game, there is a chance of obtaining an advantageous state in both the game ball entered in the first specific game and the game ball entered in the second specific game. . As a result, it is possible to expand the chances of obtaining an advantageous state, and the interest is improved.

Feature A3. The specifying means is
At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined area (entrance guide part 215) upstream of the passing part. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that can be retained without
Retention release means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be moved toward the passing portion by causing the game ball to stay in the variable ball entering means and releasing the stay. In this case, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passing section can be controlled by the retention release timing, and the passing section can be passed at a timing that does not depend on the ball entering timing to the variable ball entering means. For example, if the game ball is easily carried over to the second specific game when it is entered at a specific timing, such as the end of the first specific game, there is a risk of causing rampant aiming, but according to this structure By doing so, such actions are suppressed, and it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature A4. Distributing means (second distributing member 310) capable of distributing game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to the staying means side and a side different from the staying means side,
The distributing means into a first distribution mode (distribution state) capable of distributing the game balls to the staying means side and a second distribution mode (non-distribution state) capable of distributing the game balls to the different side. Distribution control means for switching between (a function of switching and controlling the second distribution member 310 by the main controller 81);
with
The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the distribution control means comprises means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the retention is released by the retention release means.

According to the above configuration, after the retention of the game balls is released, the allocation to the retention means side is permitted. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the retaining means after the space is secured in the predetermined area in which the game ball is retained. As a result, although the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means could be directed toward the staying means, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball that is already staying hinders the staying. become.

Feature A5. The retention release means does not release the retention under the condition that the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and releases the retention under the condition that the variable ball entry means is in the second mode. A gaming machine according to feature A3 or A4, characterized by comprising means for

In the first mode in which the game ball can enter or is likely to enter the variable ball entering means, the player's consciousness tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. Therefore, if the retention is released under the condition of the first mode, the player may miss the release of the retention. In this respect, in this configuration, the retention is canceled under the second mode in which the game ball cannot or hardly enters the variable ball entry means, so that the cancellation of the retention can be prevented from being overlooked.

Feature A6. Distributing means (second distributing member 310) capable of distributing game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the first specific game to the staying means side and a side different from the staying means side prepared,
While the game balls distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game, the game balls distributed to the different side by the distribution means The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to pass through the passage portion in the first specific game.

According to the above configuration, a game in which the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is carried over to the second specific game after that, and the game ball is passed to the passage part in the first specific game. It is possible to build a game to pass. As a result, the playability of the specific game is diversified, and novel playability not conventionally available can be provided. In addition, by intervening the sorting by the sorting means, it is possible to clarify the sorting of the game characteristics, and it is possible to suppress the player's confusion.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the game balls distributed to the staying means side by the distribution means pass through the passing portion more easily than the game balls distributed to the different side. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation that the game ball entering the variable ball entering means will be distributed to the staying means side. In addition, when retention occurs, the player can easily have a special impression, and it is possible to increase the significance of providing the retention means as a whole.

In addition, this feature is defined as "the probability that the game balls distributed to the staying means side by the distribution means pass through the passing section is higher than the probability that the game balls distributed to the different side pass the passing section. It is getting higher.”

Feature A8. A game ball entering the variable ball entry means has a lower probability of being distributed to the staying means side by the distribution means than a probability of being distributed to the different side by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to feature A7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive advantages for the player while increasing the significance of providing the staying means.

Feature A9. a first sorting means as the sorting means;
A second distribution means (rotating body 201) capable of distributing the game balls distributed to the different sides by the first distribution means to a plurality of passing parts including a specific passing part as the passing part. The game machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add interest to the movement of the game balls distributed to different sides by the first distribution means, and to provide the opportunity to pass through the passing section. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the game even when the game balls entering the variable ball entering means are not sorted to the staying means side.

Feature A10. The first distribution means and the second distribution means are visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the visibility of the first distribution means is lower than the visibility of the second distribution means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the visibility of the first distribution means is made lower than that of the second distribution means, so that the first distribution means can aim at the timing of distribution to the retention means side. can be suppressed. On the other hand, as for the second sorting means, it is possible to make it easier to see how the game balls are sorted, to increase interest in the second sorting means, and to improve its presence.

Feature A11. Characteristic A9 or A10, characterized in that the game ball released from the retention by the retention release means can pass through the specific passage portion without passing through the second sorting means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, there is no need to consider the retention release ball in designing the operation of the second distribution means, and the control of the second distribution means can be simplified. In addition, since the retention release ball does not pass through the second sorting means, interference between the retention release ball and the game balls sorted to different sides in the second sorting means is suppressed. . As a result, when a situation occurs in which one of the game balls is likely to be distributed to the specific passing portion, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as obstruction by the other game ball.

Feature A12. a first release means as the retention release means;
A second release means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passing portion in the first specific game;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A11, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the retention release ball may pass through the passing portion in the first specific game. As a result, the player's interest in the release timing can be heightened, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature A13. After the start of the specific game, based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (that the number of prizes awarded to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit, or that the number of openings of the opening and closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit). and a specific game end means (a function of executing open processing by the main control device 81) for ending the specific game,
The specific game ending means is characterized in that even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied in the specific game, the specific game can be continued until the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12.

For example, in the configuration in which the specific game ends when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the carry-over ball from the first specific game passes before the ball is entered into the variable ball entry means in the second specific game. When passing through the part, the second specific game ends without any ball entering, and the inconvenience that the second specific game cannot be fully played may occur. In this respect, according to this configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the end condition is satisfied, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience is avoided. It becomes possible to appropriately secure the game period of the specific game.

Feature A14. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) for shifting to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed multiple times is provided. ,
The special game state is configured so that the next specific game can be executed based on the game ball passing through the passing portion in one of the specific games,
The specifying means enables the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the first specified game to pass through the passing portion in the second specified game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized by:

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which the specific game can be executed a plurality of times, and in the special game state, the next specific game can be performed by passing the game ball through the passage part in one specific game. be possible. That is, passing the game ball through the passing portion is the execution condition for the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passage part in the second specific game executed later. becomes. When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the second specific game, it is the specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game) that can be executed after the second specific game. The game becomes a specific game after the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the performance of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel game characteristics. be possible.

Feature A15. The specifying means is
At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined area (entrance guide part 215) upstream of the passing part. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that can be retained without
Retention release means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81);
with
When the game ball has not yet passed through the passage portion at the specific timing of the first specific game (the timing when the number of prizes awarded to the accessory device 150 has become 8), the predetermined area The gaming machine according to feature A14, further comprising means for canceling the retention so that the game ball in the second specific game can pass through the passing portion in the first specific game.

Under the configuration where passing the game ball through the passage part is the condition for performing the next specific game, in the first specific game, even if the game ball can be retained, the game ball does not pass through the passage part If not, the next specific game will not be executed, and the stay will be nullified. In this case, the player will be greatly disappointed, and there is a risk that the player's desire to play will diminish. In this regard, in this configuration, when the passage portion has not been passed at the specific timing of the first specific game, the staying ball is utilized to pass through the passage portion in the first specific game. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the next specific game is not executed while the game balls are staying. In addition, since such relief is limited to the case where there is a staying ball, it is expected to have the effect of increasing the motivation to create a staying ball.

Feature A16. The predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion (actuation openings 38, 39) provided in the game area,
Based on the passing of the game ball through the passing portion in the specific game (first opening/closing execution mode), a transition is made to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that:

A specific game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering part provided in the game area, and if the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the specific game passes through the passing part, the player It shifts to a special game state that is advantageous for Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passage part in the second specific game later. . In this case, if a game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the game ball will generate a chance to acquire the specific game state even after the first specific game is finished. Therefore, compared with the conventional game machine in which the chance ends with the end of the first specific game, the amusement is improved.

Feature A17. A lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (winning a prize at the operation openings 38, 39),
The predetermined condition is that the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific result (jackpot result),
As game states, there are a first game state (low probability mode) and a second game state (high probability mode) in which the lottery result of the lottery means is more likely to be the specific result than the first game state. ,
Features A1 to A16 characterized by comprising means for shifting the game state after the end of the specific game to the second game state based on the game ball passing through the passing portion in the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game, the lottery result shifts to the second game state in which the specific result is likely to occur. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passage part in the second specific game later. . In this case, if a game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the game ball generates a chance to shift to the second game state even after the first specific game is finished. Therefore, compared with the conventional game machine in which the chance ends with the end of the first specific game, the amusement is improved.

Feature A18. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second opening and closing execution mode is started, the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first opening and closing execution mode, the normal opening result based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 a special game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by main control device 81);
When the specific game is executed over a plurality of times, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game of the specific game a plurality of times is later than the first specific game. Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, second distribution member 310 and shutter 221 by main controller 81 to be discharged from the variable entry means in the second specific game function to control the operation mode);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to said characteristic A1. Further, each configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A17 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A18, any one configuration of the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second opening and closing execution mode is started, the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first opening and closing execution mode, the normal opening result based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 a special game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by main control device 81);
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, out sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of game balls from the variable ball entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, a specific process execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
with
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the specific process executing means does not perform the specific process separately for each specific game, and performs one specific process for the specific game for a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being configured to be able to execute processing.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and a game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. When the ball is thrown, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specific process is executed to identify the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, the entry and exit of the game ball to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of illegally trying to obtain a privilege is suppressed.

Normally, the specific processing for specifying the remaining state is performed for each specific game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls match at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the specific game, limiting the degree of freedom in game design. In this regard, according to this configuration, since one specific process is executed for a plurality of times of the specific game, it is sufficient if the number of entered balls and the number of discharged balls correspond to each other in the plurality of times of the specific game. As a result, the specific game can be ended with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, and the degree of freedom in game design can be increased. Moreover, since the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the specific process.

Feature B2. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) for shifting to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed multiple times;
a passing portion (V winning sensor 192) through which the game ball entered by the variable ball entering means can pass;
with
The special game state is configured so that the next specific game can be executed based on the game ball passing through the passing portion in one of the specific games,
The specific process executing means is configured to be able to execute one specific process for a plurality of times of the specific game without performing the specific process for each specific game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that:

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which the specific game can be executed a plurality of times, and in the special game state, the next specific game can be performed by passing the game ball through the passage part in one specific game. be possible. That is, passing the game ball through the passing portion is the execution condition for the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, it is possible to execute one specific process for a plurality of specific games in the special game state. In this case, a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in one specific game is carried over to the next specific game and after and passes through the passing part, thereby realizing a novel game property that determines the execution of the specific game. be able to.

Feature B3. The specific process executing means does not execute the specific process for each specific game in the special game state, and means for executing the specific process in response to the end of the final specific game (main controller 81) is provided.

According to the above configuration, since one specific process is collectively executed for the special game state, the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, since the specific process is executed in units of the special game state, there is no need to switch between allowing the carryover of game balls in a certain specific game and regulating the carryover in other specific games, and a configuration that controls the presence or absence of carryover. It simplifies the process.

Feature B4. Discharging from the variable ball entering means at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the first specified game executed earlier among the specific games executed in the special game state. means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210), the gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3.

According to the above configuration, the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game executed later. When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the second specific game, it is the specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game) that can be executed after the second specific game. The game becomes a specific game after the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the performance of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel game characteristics. be possible.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature B3, in order to collectively execute one specific process for the special game state, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means is carried over to the later specific game. However, the effect that it becomes possible to appropriately determine the residual ball abnormality is expected.

Feature B5. Discharging from the variable ball entering means at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the first specified game executed earlier among the specific games executed in the special game state. means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210),
While the carryover is allowed in the first specific game, the carryover is restricted in the second specific game,
The specific process executing means does not perform the specific process corresponding to the end of the first specific game, but the means for executing the specific process corresponding to the end of the second specific game (remaining by the main controller 81 A gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized by comprising a function of executing a ball determination process.

According to the above configuration, the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game executed later. When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the second specific game, it is the specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game) that can be executed after the second specific game. The game becomes a specific game after the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the performance of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel game characteristics. be possible.

Furthermore, in this configuration, by restricting carryover in the second specific game, it is possible to match the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls with respect to the variable entering means at the end of the second specific game. In addition, since the specific process is performed at the end of the second specific game, the specific process can be executed in the middle of the special game state. As a result, it is possible to quickly grasp the abnormality of the remaining balls, and it is possible to suppress the damage to the game hall from becoming large when the fraudulent act is carried out. In addition, since the specific process is not executed at the end of the first specific game in which carrying over is allowed, it is possible to suppress the erroneous determination of the remaining ball abnormality.

Feature B6. In the special game state, the specific game can be executed up to a predetermined specific number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein at least the specific game preceding the specific number of times is the second specific game.

Even if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game immediately before the specific number of times passes through the passage part in the specific game of the specific number of times, the next specific game is not executed. , There is little merit for the player who allows the game ball to be carried over in the specific game that precedes the specific number of times. Utilizing this characteristic, in this configuration, the specific game that is one before the specific number of times is set as the specific game whose carryover is restricted, and the specific process is executed at the end of the specific game. This makes it possible to execute the specific process during the special game state without impairing the player's profit.

Feature B7. At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined area (entrance guide part 215) upstream of the passing part. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that can be retained without
Retention release means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to achieve a practically preferable aspect in realizing carryover of game balls. In particular, after the end of the first specific game, how long the game ball remains in the variable ball entry means can be controlled by the release timing of the retention release means. As a result, the game ball can be carried over to the second specific game even if the retention time is not gained by expanding the retention area or extending the ball passage, etc., suppressing the enlargement of the variable ball entry means and the complication of the configuration. It becomes possible. Moreover, by providing the retention release means, the game ball can be carried over to the second specific game without depending on the generation timing of retention. For example, if the game ball is carried over to the second specific game only when retention occurs at a specific timing, the player needs to pay attention to the occurrence timing of retention, and attention tends to be distracted. Become. In this respect, according to the present configuration, such consideration becomes unnecessary, and the game can be played by concentrating on staying.

Feature B8. Abnormality handling means (function for executing game stoppage processing by the main controller 81) is provided for carrying out anomaly handling processing (game stoppage processing) when an abnormality in the remaining balls is detected as a result of the identification processing. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, since the abnormality handling process is executed when the residual ball abnormality is detected, it is possible to suppress fraudulent actions.

Feature B9. At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of the specific games is placed in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) in the variable ball entry means. ), a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that allows the ball to remain without being discharged from the variable ball entry means;
Release means for releasing the retention (shutter by main controller 81) so that the game ball in the predetermined area is discharged from the variable ball entry means in the second specific game executed after the first specific game 221 in an open state);
with
Characteristic B8, wherein the abnormality handling means includes means for executing the abnormality handling process without canceling the retention by the retention means when the remaining ball abnormality is detected. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the abnormality handling process is canceled, the stagnation is not released, so that it is possible to secure an opportunity for the attendant of the game arcade to attend with the stagnation ball remaining. As a result, when the attendant or the like can confirm that there is no fraudulent act, it is possible to utilize the staying balls to help the player.

Feature B10. Abnormality cancellation means for canceling the abnormality handling process executed by the abnormality handling means (function for executing the main process by the main controller 81),
The abnormality canceling means is
a first means for canceling the abnormality handling process by preventing the retention from being canceled when a specific operation is performed (when the power switch 92b is operated without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a);
When an operation different from the specific operation is performed (when the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed and the power switch 92b is operated), the retention is canceled so as to cancel the abnormality handling process. 2 means and
The gaming machine according to feature B9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, by changing the operation mode, it is possible to select whether or not to leave the staying ball, and to cancel the abnormality handling process. As a result, when it is confirmed by an attendant of the game hall or the like whether or not the cause of the remaining ball abnormality is fraud, it is possible to change the response according to the confirmation result.

Feature B11. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) and,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
Round game execution means (round game) for executing a round game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the second opening/closing execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied) a function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81;
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, out sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of game balls from the variable ball entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, a specific process execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
with
The specific processing executing means does not perform the specific processing for each of the round games when the round game is executed a plurality of times, and performs one specific processing for the round game for a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being configured to be able to execute processing.

According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to said characteristic B1. In addition, in this feature, "round game" means "the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches a predetermined upper limit number, or the period or number of times that the variable ball entering means is in the second mode. can be expressed as "a game that ends based on reaching a predetermined upper limit". Further, each configuration described in any one of the features B1 to B10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature B12. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second opening and closing execution mode is started, the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first opening and closing execution mode, the normal opening result based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 a special game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by main control device 81);
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, out sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of game balls from the variable ball entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, a specific process execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
with
The specific process executing means executes the specific process for entering a game ball into the variable ball entering means and discharging the entered game ball in the specific game at a specific timing after the specific game is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and a game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. When the ball is thrown, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specific process is executed to identify the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, the entry and exit of the game ball to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of illegally trying to obtain a privilege is suppressed.

Normally, the specific processing for specifying the remaining state is performed at the end of the specific game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls match at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the specific game, limiting the degree of freedom in game design. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the specific game ends, so it is sufficient if the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls correspond to the specific timing. As a result, the specific game can be ended with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, and the degree of freedom in game design can be increased.

Feature B13. As the variable ball entry control, there are a first control mode (open/close patterns P1, P2) and a second control mode (short open mode) in which the game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than in the first control mode. and
When the specific process is executed after the first specific game executed first among the specific games a plurality of times, in the second specific game executed next to the first specific game, the second The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the game machine is configured to be able to execute the specific process while the variable ball entry control is being performed according to the control mode.

Considering the smooth progress of the game, it is preferable to execute them in parallel rather than executing the specific process and then executing the specific game. In this regard, the above configuration includes the second control mode as one mode of the variable ball entry control, and performs a specific process during the execution period of the control mode. When variable ball entry control is performed in the second control mode, it is difficult for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means. You can prevent it from happening. That is, according to this configuration, the specific process can be executed during the second specific game, and the smooth progress of the game can be promoted.

Feature B14. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
A round game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (a big hit) can be executed over a plurality of times. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) for shifting to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode);
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, out sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of game balls from the variable ball entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, a specific process execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
Means for restricting the execution of the specific process in the predetermined round game executed in the specific game state (not executing the remaining ball determination for each round game, or the remaining balls at the end of the round game of the 2nd to 4th rounds function that does not execute judgment) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, the state shifts to a special game state, and when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specific process is executed to identify the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, the entry and exit of the game ball to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of illegally trying to obtain a privilege is suppressed.

Normally, the specific processing for specifying the remaining state is performed for each round game, but in this case, it is required that the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls match at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game must be discharged during the round game, and the degree of freedom in game design is restricted. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the execution of the specific process is restricted in a predetermined round game during the specific game state, the round game can be ended with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, The degree of freedom in game design can be increased. Moreover, since the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the specific process. Note that each configuration described in any one of the features B1 to B13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature B15. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, out sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of game balls from the variable ball entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, a specific process execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
with
The specific processing executing means does not perform the specific processing for each of the variable ball entry controls when the variable ball entry control is executed a plurality of times, and performs the variable ball entry control for the multiple times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute one of the specific processes for the player.

According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to said characteristic B1. Further, each configuration described in any one of the features B1 to B14 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B15, any one configuration of features A1 to A18, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) and,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
with
As the specific game in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once, a first specific game (first opening and closing execution mode) executed under the first condition, and a game that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game and a second specific game (second opening/closing execution mode) executed under a second condition different from the first condition,
The second condition is that the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through the passage portion (V winning sensor 192),
At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game is placed in a predetermined area upstream of the passing section (for entrance) until a specific timing after the end of the second specific game. (Second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, function of controlling operation mode of second distribution member 310 and shutter 221 by main controller 81) and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in order to generate the second specific game that is advantageous to the player, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means and pass the game ball through the passing section. Under such circumstances, in this configuration, at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game can be retained in the variable ball entry means even after the second specific game is finished. It has become. According to this configuration, after the second specific game is finished, even if the game ball is not entered into the variable ball entry means, the game ball is present in the variable ball entry means, and the game ball passes through the passing portion. A new second specific game is executed by passing. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to generate a new second specific game by a game ball entered by the variable ball entry means during the second specific game, thereby improving the interest.

Feature C2. When the second specific game ends, means for generating the case where the stay is occurring and the case where the stay is not occurring (by the main controller 81 Steps S1905, S1906 are executed function).

According to the above configuration, the game balls do not always stay when the second specific game ends. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the amusement of enjoying whether or not it is possible to cause a stay at the end of the second specified game, and the amusement is improved compared to the case where the second specified game is only vaguely completed. .

Feature C3. The specifying means includes means for canceling the stay regardless of the game situation (function of executing the process of step S3009 by the main controller 81) when the specified timing comes after the end of the second specified game. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, at the specific timing after the second specific game, the retention of the game ball is released regardless of the game situation at that time. Timing adjustment with execution timing of 1 specific game is not made. Therefore, there is room for the player to generate the first specific game so as to match the timing of the ball passing through the passing part, thereby giving the player the pleasure of enjoying whether or not both timings match. becomes. In addition, in this feature, "regardless of the game situation" may be rephrased as "regardless of the execution situation of the first specific game".

Feature C4. Characteristic C3, characterized by comprising a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification suggesting the specific timing or the period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when there is a staying ball at the end of the second specific game, it is possible to predict the timing at which the staying ball passes through the passing section by referring to the predetermined notification. As a result, a game is created in which the first specific game is generated so as to match the predicted timing, and the amusement is improved.

In place of or in addition to feature C4, "a specific notification suggesting the elapsed time period up to the specific timing or the elapsed time period after the second specific game is completed is performed by a predetermined notification means. and a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means". Also in this case, by referring to the specific notification, it becomes possible to predict the timing at which the staying ball passes through the passing portion, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature C4. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature C4, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means for performing the predetermined notification, or may be performed by another notification means.

Feature C5. A ball entry portion (actuation openings 38, 39) that allows the game ball fired by the shooting means to enter and triggers the start of the first specific game;
Suspending means (suspended ball storage area 114b) capable of suspending the execution of the start opportunity corresponding to the entering ball when the game ball enters the entering ball portion during execution of the second specific game and,
Means (data setting processing by the main controller 81) capable of executing the first specific game based on the suspension after the second specific game is completed when there is the suspension at the end of the second specific game function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, it is possible to generate the first specific game using the hold, while if there is no hold, the game ball is entered into the ball entering section. The first specific game cannot occur unless it is caused. That is, when a hold is caused, it is possible to facilitate the occurrence of the first specific game more than in the other case, and it is possible to proceed with the game advantageously. Furthermore, in the above configuration, when a ball is entered into the ball during execution of the second specific game, a hold occurs. Thus, in the second specific game, the pleasure of entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means and the enjoyment of entering the game ball into the entering portion to cause suspension can be provided at the same time.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the ball entry section is arranged downstream of the variable ball entry means.

According to the above configuration, since the ball-entering section is arranged on the downstream side of the variable-ball-entering means, in the second specific game, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of causing a hold due to a spilled ball from the variable-ball-entering means. . As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest even to the game ball that has not entered the variable ball entering means, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C7. When the first condition is established after the end of the second specific game and the first result (the value of the acquired open type counter CS is 50 to 99), the first specific game is performed at the first timing ( after the opening standby time of 2 seconds has elapsed), while the first condition is satisfied and the second result is different from the first result (the obtained value of the opening type counter CS is 0 to 49). Any of the features C3 to C6, characterized by comprising means for executing the first specific game at a second timing (after an opening standby time of 0.5 sec has elapsed) different from the first timing. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the first specific game when the first condition is established is diversified. In this case, even if the timing at which the retention release ball passes through the passage portion is predicted and the first condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to match the passage timing with the execution timing of the first specific game. As a result, it is possible to suppress aiming and to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature C8. A ball entry portion (actuation openings 38, 39) that allows the game ball fired by the shooting means to enter and triggers the start of the first specific game;
Suspending means (suspended ball storage area 114b) capable of suspending the execution of the start opportunity corresponding to the entering ball when the game ball enters the entering ball portion during execution of the second specific game and,
A first specific game execution means (main control device) capable of executing the first specific game based on the reservation after the second specific game is completed when the second specific game is terminated when the second specific game is terminated 81), and
with
When the first specific game based on the holding is executed at the first timing (after the lapse of the open standby time of 2 sec), the retention release ball that has been released from the retention passes through the passage part in the first specific game When it becomes a first state in which it is possible to pass or is easy to pass, and is executed at a second timing (after an open waiting time of 0.5 sec has elapsed) different from the first timing, the retention release ball is the first specific game The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the passage portion is in a second state in which it is impossible to pass through or is more difficult to pass through than in the first state.

According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, it is possible to generate the first specific game using the hold, while if there is no hold, the game ball is entered into the ball entering section. The first specific game cannot occur unless it is caused. That is, when a hold is caused, it is possible to facilitate the occurrence of the first specific game more than in the other case, and it is possible to proceed with the game advantageously. However, when the first specific game based on hold is executed at the first timing, the second specific game is more likely to occur, but when it is executed at the second timing, the second specific game is less likely to occur. In other words, if there is only a hold at the end of the second specific game, the continuous game of the second specific game is not guaranteed, and the player cannot relax even if the game ball stays and causes a hold. becomes. As a result, it is possible to keep the player's attention on the development of the game after the second specific game is finished, and to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C9. Prior specifying means for specifying whether or not the first specific game based on the suspension is executed at the first timing before the execution of the start opportunity based on the suspension (a function that performs prefetching by the main control device 81 )and,
When the first specific game is specified to be executed at the first timing by the destination specification means, so that the specific notification is performed by the predetermined notification means before the end of the second specific game, Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means;
The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to play the second specific game after knowing that if the game balls stay at the end of the second specific game, the possibility of consecutive games increases. Become. As a result, it is possible to remarkably increase the willingness to have a state of retention at the end of the second specific game, and to further improve the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the game balls staying in the variable ball entering means are visible from the front of the gaming machine after the end of the second specific game.

According to the above configuration, the player can visually grasp whether or not there is a stagnation, and when stagnation occurs, it is possible to effectively arouse expectations for the occurrence of a new second specific game.

Feature C11. a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, out sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of game balls from the variable ball entry means;
Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, a specific process execution means (by the main controller 81 A function to execute remaining ball determination processing) and
The specific process executing means performs the specific process for entering a game ball into the variable entering means in the second specific game and discharging the entered game ball, and performing the specific process for the discharge of the entered game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, further comprising means for executing after being ejected from the means.

According to the above configuration, even if the second specific game ends with game balls remaining in the variable ball entering means, the number of balls entering the variable ball entering means and the number of discharged balls can be matched in the specific processing, It becomes possible to appropriately perform the remaining ball determination.

Feature C12. The specific processing execution means is a means for executing the specific processing when a predetermined judgment waiting period (6 sec) has passed after the end of the second specific game (a function of executing the processing of step S3010 by the main controller 81 ),
The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the predetermined judgment waiting period is longer than a period until the staying game ball is discharged from the variable ball entering means.

In the above configuration, the specific processing is executed in accordance with the elapse of the judgment waiting period after the second specific game is finished, and during the judgment waiting period, the staying ball is discharged from the variable ball entry means. It is considered to be a longer period than the period until As a result, it becomes possible to execute the specific process after the staying ball is discharged without performing the process of confirming whether or not the staying ball has been discharged.

Feature C13. The specific process execution means executes the specific process according to the elapse of the determination standby period if the first specific game is not in progress when the determination standby period has elapsed, while the determination standby period has elapsed When the first specific game is in progress, means for executing the specific process in response to the end of the first specific game (steps S3012 to S3016 by the main controller 81, S3002 to S3005 are executed function).

For example, when the first specific game is in progress when the judgment waiting period elapses, in a configuration in which specific processing is performed according to the elapse of the judgment waiting period, a ball is entered into the variable ball entry means immediately before the judgment waiting period elapses. However, if the game balls entered after the period has elapsed are discharged, the specific processing is executed in a state in which the number of discharged balls is smaller than the number of entered balls, resulting in an erroneous determination of an abnormality in the remaining balls. In this regard, in this configuration, if the first specific game is in progress when the judgment waiting period elapses, the specific processing is performed after the first specific game is finished, so the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls are matched. Specific processing can be executed, and the erroneous determination can be suppressed.

Feature C14. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) and,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
A specific means (second allocation) capable of causing at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means under the variable ball entry control to remain in the variable ball entry means even after the variable ball entry control. member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature C1. Further, each configuration described in any one of the features C1 to C13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C14, any one configuration of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (function for executing processing during control by the main controller 81 )and,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
Specific game execution means (game control by main controller 81) for executing a specific game (first opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (winning to operation ports 38, 39) function to perform processing) and
Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage) that allows at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game to be discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game 210, a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
with
The specifying means determines the discharge timing of the game ball from the variable ball entering means when the game result after the specified game is the first game result (when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period). At the first timing, when the game result after the specific game is a second game result different from the first game result (when a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the first opening/closing execution mode has not occurred), the The game machine is characterized by comprising a means for setting a second timing different from the first timing.

In the above configuration, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game can be discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game. At this time, the discharge timing of the game ball is diversified into a plurality of timings including the first timing and the second timing, and the interest can be improved as compared with the case where the discharge timing is uniform. Further, the first timing is set when the game result after the specific game is the first game result, and the second timing is set when the game result after the specific game is the second game result. In this case, the game after the end of the specific game affects the discharge timing of the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means in the specific game. As a result, interest in the game increases after the specific game ends, and it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. Characteristic feature D1, characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is different between when the game ball discharge timing from the variable ball entering means is the first timing and when it is the second timing. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse a strong interest in whether the game result after the specific game will be the first game result or the second game result, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game is finished can be increased. Get even higher.

Feature D3. After the specific game, if the first game result is not obtained, the second game result is obtained,
Characteristic feature D1 or D2, characterized in that discharging game balls at the first timing is more advantageous for the player than discharging game balls at the second timing. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the desire to make the game result after the specific game become the first game result is aroused, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game ends is further increased.

Feature D4. Based on a predetermined game result (V winning) by the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means, the player is shifted to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game. Game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 81),
The first game result is that the predetermined condition is established by a specific timing after the end of the specific game,
The specifying means carries over from the previous specific game in the specific game executed in response to the first game result when the first game result is obtained after the previous specific game. Characteristic features D1 to D1 to The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

According to the above configuration, if the predetermined condition is satisfied by the specific timing after the end of the specific game, the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means in the previous specific game can be shifted to the special game state. can be done. As a result, it is possible to provide an advantageous period during which the player can easily shift to the special game state after the end of the specific game. As a result, the game becomes more exciting after the specific game, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the advantageous period is limited to a specific timing, it is possible to create a case where the advantageous period ends before the predetermined condition is met. As a result, the game can be played in the thrill that the advantageous period may end before the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the amusement is improved.

Feature D5. Means (second 2 distribution member 310, rotator 201, function of controlling operation modes of second distribution member 310 and rotator 201 by main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, a predetermined game result can be obtained even in the previous specific game. In this case, as an opportunity to shift to the special game state, there is a first opportunity where a predetermined game result is obtained in the previous specific game, and a predetermined condition is established by a specific timing, and a predetermined game result is obtained in the later specific game. Multiple opportunities for the second opportunity can be provided. Usually, the transition to the special game state is limited to the case where a predetermined game result is obtained in one specific game, but according to this configuration, there is room to shift to the special game state even after the specific game is finished. It is left, and interest improves.

Feature D6. Characteristic feature D4 or D5, characterized in that the predetermined condition is established based on a game ball entering a ball entry portion (actuation openings 38, 39) provided in the game area. game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined condition is established based on the ball entering the ball entering section, after the end of the specific game, interest in the movement and whereabouts of the game ball on the game area increases, and watching them It is possible to reinforce the fun of enjoying. In addition, it becomes possible to realize the configuration of feature D4 or D5 by utilizing an existing control program, and it is possible to reduce the number of program changes. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on game machine design due to program changes.

Feature D7. The specifying means is
At least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entering means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable ball entering means without being discharged from the variable ball entering means. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
A retention release means for releasing the retention (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81),
The retention release means includes means for releasing the retention so that the predetermined game result is achieved in the subsequent specific game when the first game result is obtained after the previous specific game. The game machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, even if the player satisfies the predetermined condition at any timing up to the specific timing, the game machine can set the retention release timing (the game ball variable The discharge timing from the entering ball means) is controlled. As a result, the player does not have to worry about the timing until the condition is satisfied, and can concentrate on satisfying the predetermined condition.

When this characteristic is applied to the characteristic D5, (1) the predetermined game result was achieved in the previous specific game, and (2) the predetermined game result was not obtained in the previous specific game. , the game ball was able to stay, and (3) the predetermined game result was not achieved in the preceding specific game, and the game ball could not be held. It is possible to expand the range of ways of enjoying compared to the conventional game machine which has only an alternative game feature of whether or not a predetermined game result is achieved.

Feature D8. Discharging game balls at the first timing is more advantageous for the player than discharging game balls at the second timing,
Characteristic features D1 to D7, characterized by comprising state means for setting the state after the specific game to a first state and a second state in which the degree of expectation for the first game result is relatively high and low. The gaming machine according to any one of

In the above configuration, the first game result is advantageous for the player, and the first state and the second state in which the degree of expectation is relatively high and low are provided, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous after the specific game. And it becomes possible to improve interest.

Feature D9. The first game result is that the predetermined condition is established by a specific timing after the end of the specific game,
The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the period until the specific timing differs between the first state and the second state.

According to the above configuration, if the period until the specific timing is long, the degree of expectation for the first game result is high, and if it is short, the degree of expectation is low.

Feature D10. Characteristic features D4 to characterized by comprising notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification suggesting the specific timing or the period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of D9.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific timing by referring to the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to recognize by when the predetermined condition should be satisfied, and the playability is improved.

In place of or in addition to the feature D10, "a specific notification suggesting the progress of the period until the specific timing or the elapsed period after the second specific game is completed is performed by a predetermined notification means. and a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means". In this case, by referring to the specific notification, the remaining period until the specific timing can be grasped, and the tension that the advantageous period may end without obtaining the first game result can be effectively aroused. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature D10, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means for performing the predetermined notification, or may be performed by another notification means.

Feature D11. Based on a predetermined game result (V winning) by the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means, the player is shifted to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game. Game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 81),
The specifying means is
At least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entering means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable ball entering means without being discharged from the variable ball entering means. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
Retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the retention based on the number of times of the specific game becoming a predetermined number;
with
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that the predetermined game result can be achieved by the game ball released from the retention by the retention release means.

In the above configuration, when the number of times of the specific game reaches a predetermined number, the retention is released, and the retention release ball results in a predetermined game result and shifts to the special game state. As a result, it is possible to remedy the case where the specific game is not shifted to the special game state no matter how many times the specific game is repeated, and the easiness of play is improved.

Feature D12. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (function for executing processing during control by the main controller 81 )and,
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
Specifying means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, the warp path 210, the function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
with
The specifying means determines the discharge timing of the game ball from the variable ball entry means when the game result after the variable ball entry control is the first game result (when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period of time). ) is set as the first timing, and the game result after the variable ball entry control is a second game result different from the first game result (when a predetermined period has passed while the first opening/closing execution mode has not occurred) (2) a gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a second timing different from the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the feature D1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any one of the features D1 to D11 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features D1 to D12, any one configuration of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) and,
According to a predetermined condition (a big hit), the specific game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is shifted to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed multiple times. game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
A game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide part 215) in the variable ball entry means without being discharged from the variable ball entry means. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
Retention release means for releasing the retention (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) so that the game ball in the predetermined area is discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game;
Among the plurality of specific games executed in the special game state, in the first specific game (3 rounds to 7 rounds), which is one of the specific games, the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is the In a second specific game (12 rounds to 16 rounds) different from the first specific game, which is easily retained by the retention means, the game ball entering the variable entry means than the first specific game is the retention means A specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main controller 81) that makes it difficult to stay due to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to cause the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game to remain in the variable ball entry means even after the specific game is over. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to be discharged from the variable ball entering means across the specific game, and to provide novel game characteristics. In this case, for example, if the susceptibility of retention by the retention means (in other words, the susceptibility of the game balls to be carried over) is standardized, the carryover of the game balls becomes routine, and the special game state is indifferent. It can become a game just to digest. In this regard, in this configuration, retention by the retention means is likely to occur in the first specific game, and retention is less likely to occur in the second specific game, so that it is possible to diversify the susceptibility of game balls to be carried over. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. Distributing means (second distributing member 310) capable of distributing game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to the staying means side and a side different from the staying means side,
Distribution control means for controlling the distribution means (function for executing the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main controller 81);
with
The distributing means is controlled so that the distributing mode of the distributing means is common between the first specific game and the second specific game,
Characteristic feature E1, characterized in that the variable ball entry control is executed such that the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball entry means differs between the first specific game and the second specific game. game machine.

In the above configuration, the distribution mode of the distribution means is made common to the first specific game and the second specific game, and the susceptibility to retention is differentiated by the variable entry control. In this case, it is not necessary to finely set the distribution mode of the distribution means and the execution mode of the variable ball entry control for each specific game, and it is sufficient to set only the latter. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load required for control and the work load in designing the game machine.

Moreover, the following effect is also expected by the said structure. In a configuration in which game balls are carried over due to retention, the player's attention is likely to be focused on whether or not retention occurs. In this case, it is assumed that the player shows a strong interest in the sorting means that influences the presence or absence of retention, and pays close attention to its movement. Under such circumstances, if the movement of the sorting means is made different, the player may notice it and lose interest by understanding that the difference in the susceptibility to staying is prearranged. In this regard, in this configuration, since the movement of the sorting means is common to each specific game, such a notice can be suppressed. As a result, the difference in the ease of staying can be easily felt to be due to chance, and the amusement of enjoying the behavior of the game ball can be preferably provided.

Feature E3. One of the specific games can be divided into a plurality of game sections according to the number of executions of the variable ball entry control,
The distributing means is controlled so that the distributing mode of the distributing means in each of the game sections is common between the first specific game and the second specific game,
The variable entry control is executed such that the ease of entry of the game ball to the variable entry means is different in at least one of the game sections between the first specific game and the second specific game. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by:

In the above configuration, while the distribution mode of the distribution means in each game section is common between the first specific game and the second specific game, at least one of each game section has a different configuration of variable ball entry control. It's becoming In this case, if a game section in which the distribution means easily distributes the game ball to the retention means side is combined with a ball entry control mode in which the ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means, it is possible to generate a characteristic in which retention is likely to occur, and a ball entry can be generated. Combining aspects in which it is difficult to cause retention can produce a characteristic in which retention is difficult to occur. In other words, it is possible to easily change the tendency of retention to occur, and it is possible to reduce the design burden of variable ball entry control.

Feature E4. A passage section (V winning sensor 192) through which the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means can pass,
In the special game state, it is possible to perform the next specific game based on the game ball passing through the passing portion in one of the specific games,
Of the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means in the specific game, game balls that are not retained by the retention means can pass through the passing portion in the specific game, and game balls retained by the retention means are the The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it is configured such that it is possible to pass through the passing section in the specific game executed after the specific game.

In the above configuration, by passing the game ball through the passage part in one specific game, it becomes possible to perform the next specific game, and passing the game ball through the passage part is the execution condition of the next specific game. Become. Under such circumstances, in this configuration, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the specific game, if the game ball is not retained by the retention means, it passes through the passage part in the specific game It is possible, and when it is retained by the retention means, it is configured to be able to pass through the passing portion in the later specific game. According to such a configuration, a certain specific game is achieved by a game ball entered in the immediately preceding specific game, and by a game ball entered in a specific game even before the immediately preceding specific game. It is possible to create a situation and provide a novel game property that has not existed in the past. This makes it possible to give the player a fresh impression and improve the interest.

In addition, when applying this feature to the feature E2 or E3, "the game ball that is not retained by the retention means can pass through the passage part in the specific game, and the game ball retained by the retention means is the specific game The game ball distributed to the different side by the distribution means can pass through the passage section in the specific game, and the distribution means The game balls distributed to the staying means side can pass through the passing portion in the specific game executed after the specific game.

Feature E5. After the start of the specific game, based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (that the number of prizes awarded to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit, or that the number of openings of the opening and closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit). and a specific game end means (a function of executing open processing by the main control device 81) for ending the specific game,
The specific game end means continues the specific game until the end condition is satisfied even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied in the specific game. The gaming machine described in .

For example, in a configuration in which the specific game ends when the game ball passes through the passing part, the carry-over ball from the previous specific game passes before the ball is entered into the variable ball entry means in the later specific game. If the player passes through the part, the subsequent specific game ends without any ball being entered, which can lead to the inconvenience of not being able to fully play the game. In this respect, according to this configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the end condition is satisfied, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience is avoided and the game period is reduced. can be appropriately ensured.

Feature E6. The specific game (second round round game) executed for the first time in the special game state is a first state (opening/closing pattern P1 and operation pattern SA), and then changes to a second state (combination of opening/closing pattern P1 and operation pattern SB) in which the stagnation is more likely to occur than in the first state. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, characterized by:

In the first specific game, there is no specific game to be executed before that, and no game balls are carried over. Therefore, in order to carry out the next specific game, it is essential that the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through the passing section in the specific game. In this case, for example, if the game ball does not pass through the passing portion when the retention occurs, the first specific game is finished in that state and the next specific game is not executed, and the staying ball is wasted. It is easy to worry that it will end. In this regard, in this configuration, after starting in the first state where retention is unlikely to occur, it changes to the second state where retention is likely to occur. , it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety.

When this feature is applied to feature E5, the following effects are also expected. Since the specific game ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition, the specific game may end in a short period of time if the end condition is satisfied early. In this case, if it is configured to be in the second state before the first state, the specific game ends during the second state or immediately after switching to the first state, and the game ball passes through the first specific game There is a risk that the opportunity to pass through the department may not be satisfactorily provided. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the first state is entered before the second state, the opportunity for the game ball to pass through the passage portion in the first specific game is preferably ensured, and the next specific game becomes easier to be carried out. .

Feature E7. Distributing means (second distributing member 310) capable of distributing game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to the staying means side and a side different from the staying means side,
The distributing means into a first distribution mode (distribution state) capable of distributing the game balls to the staying means side and a second distribution mode (non-distribution state) capable of distributing the game balls to the different side. Distribution control means for switching between (a function of switching and controlling the second distribution member 310 by the main controller 81);
with
Any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the distribution control means comprises means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the retention is canceled by the retention cancellation means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, after the retention of the game balls is released, the allocation to the retention means side is allowed. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the retaining means after the space is secured in the predetermined area in which the game ball is retained. As a result, although the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means could be directed toward the staying means, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball that is already staying hinders the staying. become.

Feature E8. The retention release means does not release the retention under the condition that the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and releases the retention under the condition that the variable ball entry means is in the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized by comprising means for performing.

In the first mode in which the game ball can enter or is likely to enter the variable ball entering means, the player's consciousness tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. Therefore, if the retention is released under the condition of the first mode, the player may miss the release of the retention. In this respect, in this configuration, the retention is canceled under the second mode in which the game ball cannot or hardly enters the variable ball entry means, so that the cancellation of the retention can be prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E8, any one configuration of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second opening and closing execution mode is started, the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first opening and closing execution mode, the normal opening result based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 a special game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by main control device 81);
When the specific game is executed over a plurality of times, the first A specifying means (a function of storing game balls in the outlet guide portion 203 by the opening/closing member 400) for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second specified game executed after the specified game;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode. Normally, whether or not a game ball entered by the variable ball entry means will result in an advantageous result is terminated with the end of the specific game in which the ball entered, but according to this configuration, the above first The game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the specific game changes the degree of advantage in the later second specific game. As a result, it is possible to play the preceding and succeeding specific games in cooperation with each other, and it is possible to improve the amusement compared to conventional gaming machines in which games are independent for each specific game.

Feature F2. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game and a predetermined game result (a result of the game ball being distributed to the exit guide part 203) is obtained, the specific means determines the second specific game. The degree of advantage in the game is set to the first degree (the state in which the V winning rate increases due to distribution to the exit guide part 203), and even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the above If the predetermined game result is not achieved, the advantage degree in the second specific game is set to a second degree that is more disadvantageous than the first degree (a state in which the V winning rate does not increase because there is no allocation to the exit guide section 203). ) (function of storing game balls in the outlet guide portion 203 by the opening/closing member 400).

For example, if the configuration determines that it is advantageous when a ball is entered into the variable ball entry means, the player is satisfied when the ball is entered, and the interest in the game ball after the entry is increased. It may become rare. In this case, even if the configuration of the variable ball-entering means is devised to make the movement of the game ball after the ball-entering interesting, a sufficient performance effect cannot be expected. In this regard, in this configuration, in order to be advantageous in the second specific game, it is not enough to just enter the ball into the variable ball entering means, and a predetermined game result is required. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game ball after it has entered.

Feature F3. A plurality of receiving units including at least one first receiving unit (V winning opening guide unit 204) and at least one second receiving unit (exit opening guide unit 203) for the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means A distribution means (rotating body 201) for distributing to
A privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player when the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part, while the privilege is not given even if the game balls are distributed to the second receiving part. Giving means (function for executing round update processing by main controller 81);
with
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the predetermined game result is that a game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the first specific game is distributed to the second receiving section.

In the above configuration, a privilege is granted when game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, and no privilege is granted when game balls are distributed to the second receiving section. Normally, when the game balls are distributed to the second receiving part which does not give the privilege, the player feels only disappointment, but in this configuration, the game balls are distributed to the second receiving part in the first specific game. And, it has a configuration that will be advantageous in the second specific game later. As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that makes the player happy regardless of whether the game balls are distributed to either the first receiving section or the second receiving section, and it is possible to suitably increase the willingness to play the game. In addition, since the second receiving part, which has been conventionally only recognized as a disadvantage, functions as a receiving part that increases the degree of advantage, it is possible to add unexpectedness and give a fresh impression to the player. Become.

Feature F4. The specifying means enters the variable ball entering means in the second specified game when the game ball entered in the variable entering means in the first specified game is distributed to the second receiving section. The probability that the game ball is distributed to the first receiving part is the first probability (probability when the V winning rate increases due to the distribution to the exit guide part 203), and the variable ball entry means is used in the first specific game A probability that a game ball entered into the variable ball entry means in the second specific game is sorted into the first acceptance section when the entered game ball is not sorted into the second acceptance section is the first probability. A second probability lower than (probability when there is no distribution to the exit guide part 203 and the V winning rate does not increase) means (function of storing game balls in the exit guide part 203 by the opening and closing member 400) The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, if the game balls are distributed to the second receiving portion in the previous first specific game, the game balls are more likely to be distributed to the first receiving portion in the second specific game later, and in the second specific game Easier to get rewards.

Feature F5. The specifying means, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving part, means for receiving (game balls are stored The function of closing the outlet guide part 203 by
Characteristic feature F3 or F4, characterized in that the second specific game can be executed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second receiving section by the receiving means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving section, it becomes impossible to receive new game balls in the second receiving section. In this case, the total number of receiving sections capable of receiving game balls is reduced among the plurality of receiving sections including the first and second receiving sections, and the proportion of the first receiving section increases accordingly. Then, since the second specific game is executed in a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept new game balls, the probability of distribution to the first receiving part increases in the second specific game, and it is easy to acquire benefits. Become. In addition, in this feature, "difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving section" means that although it is basically unacceptable, it is not absolutely impossible. In the above-described seventh embodiment, there is a situation where a game ball may land on the game ball stored in the exit guide portion 203 .

Feature F6. the plurality of receiving portions includes a third receiving portion different from any of the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion;
The privilege giving means is configured not to give the privilege even if the game balls are distributed to the third receiving unit,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that even if a game ball is received in the third receiving section, a new game ball can be received in the third receiving section.

In the above configuration, even if game balls are distributed to the third receiving section, no privilege is given, and there is no advantage in the second specific game. The presence of such a third receiving section can emphasize the superiority of the second receiving section. In addition, since the third receiving section is a disappointing receiving section for the player, it is assumed that the player will want to avoid being assigned to the third receiving section. As a result, it is expected that more attention will be paid to the movement of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, and it will be possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game ball.

Feature F7. Means for terminating the first specific game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the first specific game is executed (function for executing the open process by the main control device 81),
The predetermined end condition includes that the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches a predetermined number (9),
The gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, wherein the total number of game balls that can be received by the second receiving section is greater than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second receiving portion cannot receive the game ball easily, and to extend the period in which the game ball can be distributed to the second receiving portion.

Feature F8. As the receiving means, when the game ball is received in the second receiving part, a means that allows the game ball to be stored in the second receiving part (the function of storing the game ball in the exit guide part 203). prepared,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F7, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state in which game balls are stored in the second receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls to the second receiving section by blocking the second receiving section with the game balls stored in the second receiving section. That is, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving section, it is possible to easily construct a configuration that prohibits the receiving. In addition, since the stored ball blocks the second receiving portion, it is easy to understand visually, and it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game.

Feature F9. A canceling means (a function of canceling the storage in the middle of a round game) that cancels the state in the middle of the second specific game that makes it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball made by the said receiving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the benefit due to the game balls being distributed to the second receiving section in the previous first specific game can be obtained only until the middle of the second specific game. In this case, if the game balls are not distributed to the first receiving section in a state where there is a benefit, there is no choice but to aim for distribution to the first receiving section under a more disadvantageous situation. As a result, the tension of the player can be heightened, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature F8, "Releasing means for releasing the state of making it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball made by the receiving means in the middle of the second specific game may be used as "release means for releasing the storage of game balls in the second receiving portion during the second specific game".

Feature F10. The canceling means has a means for canceling the game regardless of the game situation (a function of canceling the accumulation after 5 seconds have passed since the start of the round) at a specific timing in the middle of the second specific game. The gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the unacceptable state is released regardless of the game situation such as whether or not the game is distributed to the first receiving section. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the tension that the benefits may be lost without being distributed to the first receiving section, and the interest is improved.

Feature F11. The feature F10, characterized by comprising notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification suggesting the specific timing or the period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the player can predict the release timing of the unacceptable or difficult state. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp until when the second specific game is advantageous, and the playability is improved.

In place of or in addition to feature F11, "a specific notification suggesting the progress of the period up to the specific timing or the elapsed period after the second specific game is completed is performed by a predetermined notification means. and a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means". Also in this case, by referring to the specific notification, it is possible to predict the release timing of the unacceptable state, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature F11. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature F11, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means for performing the predetermined notification, or may be performed by another notification means.

Feature F12. The releasing means is characterized by comprising means for performing the releasing based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the second specific game reaching a predetermined number. A gaming machine according to any one of features F9 to F11.

For example, when a game ball does not easily enter the variable ball entry means, the unacceptable state (advantageous state) may end without being sufficiently distributed by the distribution means. In this regard, according to this configuration, the unacceptable state continues until the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches a predetermined number, so the opportunity to receive distribution in an advantageous state is properly secured. can.

Feature F13. a first sorting means as the sorting means;
In the upstream of the first sorting means in the variable ball entering means, the game ball that entered the variable ball entering means is placed on the side of the first sorting means and a side different from the side of the first sorting means. A second distribution means (first distribution member 300) that distributes to
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F12, characterized in that the game balls distributed to the different sides by the second distribution means cannot reach the second receiving section. .

If it is desired to suppress excessive simplification of distribution to the first receiving parts, it is conceivable to increase the number of the second receiving parts or to increase the number of game balls received by one second receiving part. However, the structure of the first sorting means and the second receiving section is complicated, and there is a risk of increasing the burden on game machine design. In this regard, in the above configuration, the number of game balls heading for the first distribution means is reduced by the second distribution means, so the number of second receiving parts and the reception of game balls to one second receiving part The number can be reduced and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, since the second allocating means intervenes, the degree of difficulty of allocating the game balls to the second receiving section is increased, and the feeling of accomplishment when the game balls are allotted to the second receiving section can be enhanced.

Feature F14. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) for shifting to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed multiple times is provided. ,
The privilege granting means makes it possible to execute the next specified game as the privilege when game balls are distributed to the first receiving portion in one of the specified games in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F13, characterized by:

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which the specific game can be executed a plurality of times, and in the special game state, game balls are distributed to the first receiving part in one specific game, and the next specific game is performed. becomes possible. That is, the distribution of the game balls to the first receiving section becomes the execution condition for the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game balls are distributed to the second receiving part in the first specific game, so that the game balls are easily distributed to the first receiving part in the second specific game later. . When the game balls are distributed to the first receiving portion in the second specific game, it is the specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game) that is executed next to the second specific game that can be executed. When viewed from the first specific game, the third specific game is a specific game after the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the performance of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel game characteristics. be possible.

Feature F15. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) and,
Round game execution means (round game) for executing a round game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the second opening/closing execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied) a function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81;
When the round game is executed over a plurality of times, the first a specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second round game executed after the round game (a function of storing game balls in the exit guide part 203 by the opening and closing member 400);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above feature F1. In addition, in this feature, "round game" means "the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches a predetermined upper limit number, or the period or number of times that the variable ball entering means is in the second mode. can be expressed as "a game that ends based on reaching a predetermined upper limit". Further, each configuration described in any one of the features F1 to F14 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature F16. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
When the variable ball entry control is executed a plurality of times, a game in which a ball is entered by the variable ball entry means in the first variable ball entry control executed first among the plurality of times of the variable ball entry control. Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second variable ball entry control that is executed after the first variable ball entry control (the open/close member 400 causes the exit guide part 203 to store game balls) function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above feature F1. Further, each configuration described in any one of the features F1 to F15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features F1 to F16, any one configuration of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81 are performed. functions to perform) and
Specific game execution means (game state transition processing by main controller 81) for executing a specific game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the start condition of the round game is satisfied) function) and
A plurality of receiving units including at least one first receiving unit (V winning opening guide unit 204) and at least one second receiving unit (exit opening guide unit 203) for the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means Distributing means (rotating body 201) capable of distributing to
A privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player when the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part, while the privilege is not given even if the game balls are distributed to the second receiving part. Giving means (function for executing round update processing by main controller 81);
In the specific game, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the second receiving section than to distribute the game balls to the first receiving section. Specific means (a function of storing game balls in the exit guide part 203 by the opening and closing member 400, a function of increasing the number of prize balls in the exit guide part 203 than in the V winning opening guide part 204),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, Game balls are distributed to a plurality of receiving parts including a first receiving part and a second receiving part. When the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, the privilege is provided, and when the game balls are distributed to the second receiving section, the privilege is not provided. Normally, when a game ball is distributed to the second receiving section which does not give a privilege, the player feels only regret, but in this configuration, after the game ball is distributed to the first receiving section, The second receiving section is more advantageous for the player than the second receiving section. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that makes the player happy regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the first receiving section or the second receiving section, and it is possible to suitably increase the willingness to play.

Feature G2. After the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part in the specific game, the privilege giving means corresponds to the distribution even if the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part again in the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is configured not to provide the privilege.

In the above configuration, even if the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section again after the game balls have been distributed to the first receiving section, new benefits are not given accordingly. In this case, as a result of the player's satisfaction with the first distribution to the first receiving section, interest in subsequent distributions diminishes, and during the remaining period of the specific game, the degree of attention paid to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. may decrease. In this respect, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, the second receiving section is more advantageous for the player than the first receiving section. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

In addition, before the first distribution to the first reception section is made, the first reception section is more advantageous than the second reception section because the privilege is given due to the distribution to the first reception section. After the first receptacle allocation is made, the second receptacle is favored over the first receptacle. That is, the advantageous relationship is reversed before and after the allocation to the first receiving section, and two games, a game aiming at allocation to the first receiving section and a game aiming at allocation to the second receiving section, are combined into one specific game. can be realized in As a result, it is possible to improve the interest compared to the conventional game machine which only guarantees the former.

Feature G3. The specifying means is a means for making it more advantageous for the player as the number of times the game balls are distributed to the second receiving section increases after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section in the specific game ( The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2 is provided with a function of increasing the V winning rate as the number of exit guide portions 203 to which game balls are distributed increases.

For example, if the advantage degree does not change even if the game balls are repeatedly distributed to the second receiving section, after the distribution to the first receiving section, if the distribution to the second receiving section can be achieved once, the subsequent Interest in games tends to fade. In this regard, in this configuration, the more game balls are distributed to the second receiving section, the more advantageous it becomes, so even after the distribution to the second receiving section is achieved, the desire to distribute to the second receiving section is maintained. be able to. As a result, the player can enjoy the game until the end of the specific game, and the interest is improved.

In addition, this feature is that "a plurality of the second receiving parts are provided, and the specifying means, in the specific game, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part, the game balls are distributed by the distributing means. Means for making it more advantageous for the player as the number of second receiving portions to which game balls are distributed increases (function to increase the V winning rate as the number of exit guide portions 203 to which game balls are distributed increases) It can also be rephrased as "having

Feature G4. When the specific game is executed over a plurality of times, the specifying means distributes the game balls to the second receiving portion in a first specific game that is executed first among the specific games of the plurality of times. And means for making it advantageous in the second specific game executed after the first specific game (function to take over the state in which the game balls are stored in the exit guide part 203 to the next round) The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that

In the above configuration, the allocation to the second receiving section in the previous first specific game increases the degree of advantage in the subsequent second specific game. That is, the result of distribution to the second receiving section is reflected across the specific game, and novel game characteristics can be provided.

Feature G5. The specifying means, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving part, means for receiving (game balls are stored The function of closing the outlet guide part 203 by
The game according to feature G4, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second receiving section by the receiving means. machine.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving portion, it becomes impossible or difficult to receive new game balls in the second receiving portion. In this case, the total number of receiving sections capable of receiving game balls is reduced among the plurality of receiving sections including the first and second receiving sections, and the proportion of the first receiving section increases accordingly. Then, since the second specific game is executed in a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept new game balls, the probability of distribution to the first receiving part increases in the second specific game, and it is easy to acquire benefits. Become. In addition, in this feature, "difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving section" means that although it is basically unacceptable, it is not absolutely impossible. In the above-described seventh embodiment, there is a situation where a game ball may land on the game ball stored in the exit guide portion 203 .

Feature G6. As the receiving means, when the game ball is received in the second receiving part, a means that allows the game ball to be stored in the second receiving part (the function of storing the game ball in the exit guide part 203). prepared,
The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state in which game balls are stored in the second receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls to the second receiving section by blocking the second receiving section with the game balls stored in the second receiving section. That is, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving section, it is possible to easily construct a configuration that prohibits the receiving. In addition, since the stored ball blocks the second receiving portion, it is easy to understand visually, and it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game.

Feature G7. A canceling means (a function of canceling the storage in the middle of a round game) that cancels the state in the middle of the second specific game that makes it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball made by the said receiving means. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the benefit due to the game balls being distributed to the second receiving section in the previous first specific game can be obtained only until the middle of the second specific game. In this case, if the game balls are not distributed to the first receiving section in a state where there is a benefit, there is no choice but to aim for distribution to the first receiving section under a more disadvantageous situation. As a result, the tension of the player can be heightened, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature G6, "Release means for releasing the state of making it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball made by the receiving means in the middle of the second specific game may be used as "release means for releasing the storage of game balls in the second receiving portion during the second specific game".

Feature G8. a first sorting means as the sorting means;
In the upstream of the first sorting means in the variable ball entering means, the game ball that entered the variable ball entering means is placed on the side of the first sorting means and a side different from the side of the first sorting means. A second distribution means (first distribution member 300) that distributes to
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, characterized in that the game balls distributed to the different sides by the second distribution means cannot reach the second receiving section. .

If it is desired to suppress excessive simplification of distribution to the first receiving parts, it is conceivable to increase the number of the second receiving parts or to increase the number of game balls received by one second receiving part. However, the structure of the first sorting means and the second receiving section is complicated, and there is a risk of increasing the burden on game machine design. In this regard, in the above configuration, the number of game balls heading for the first distribution means is reduced by the second distribution means, so the number of second receiving parts and the reception of game balls to one second receiving part The number can be reduced and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, since the second allocating means intervenes, the degree of difficulty of allocating the game balls to the second receiving section is increased, and the feeling of accomplishment when the game balls are allotted to the second receiving section can be enhanced.

Feature G9. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the shooting means can or easily enter, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
A game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is sent to a plurality of receiving portions including at least one first receiving portion (V winning opening guide portion 204) and at least one second receiving portion (outlet opening guide portion 203). Distributing means (rotating body 201) for distributing,
A privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player when the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part, while the privilege is not given even if the game balls are distributed to the second receiving part. Giving means (function for executing round update processing by main controller 81);
After the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the second receiving part than to distribute the game balls to the first receiving part. Specific means (function of storing game balls in the exit guide part 203 by the opening and closing member 400);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the feature G1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any one of the features G1 to G8 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In addition, for each configuration of the features G1 to G9, any one configuration of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, and features F1 to F16 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The technical ideas shown in each invention of each feature A to G group described above may be applied to each invention of each feature A to G group. may be applied to each invention of Further, all or part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to G can be arbitrarily combined.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine (ball-use reel-type game machine): Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol row. The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the predetermined time has passed, and the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device for generating a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to players, furthermore, providing a ball receiving tray and executing a casting process for taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and dispensing game balls to the ball receiving tray. and a payout device, wherein the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in by the throwing device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 38... 1st operation opening, 39... 2nd operation opening, 53... Game ball launching mechanism, 81... Main control device, 92b... Power switch, 97... Payout control device, 98a... RAM erasing switch, 114b Retained ball storage area 150 Accessory device 179 Entrance sensor 183 Guidance passage 192 V prize sensor 193 Exit sensor 201 Rotator 203 Exit guide section 204 V prize Mouth guide portion 210 Warp passage 215 Entrance guide portion 221 Shutter 300 First distribution member 310 Second distribution member 400 Opening/closing member.

Claims (1)

a shooting means for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A variable input that can be switched between a first mode in which a game ball shot by the shooting means can enter or is easy to enter, and a second mode in which a game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first mode. ball means;
variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images